JP2017080212A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a model for achieving further novel amusement in a game machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine is configured to suggest or report a degree of expectation toward a jackpot in the future in advance by changing a display mode of a retained image when the retained image corresponding to occurring hold is under display, and is configured to enhance fun of a game by making the change variation rich.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  The most popular pachinko machines are now called “special symbols” (or main game symbols) on the 7-segment display, etc., when a game ball enters the starter (start chucker). When the special symbol is variably displayed and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player is in a profit state higher than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening that is normally closed This is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to (a game of contents that a so-called attacker opens under a predetermined condition). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of special symbols that are directly linked to the interests of the player, in addition to the aforementioned “special symbols”, it is referred to as “decorative symbols” for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game. The symbol to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. And when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change accordingly, and when the special symbol stops in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the decorative symbol also changes to the predetermined mode (for example, “777”). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed because the decorative symbol has stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since this mechanism is common to this type of pachinko machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise the overall production including the variation aspect of the above-mentioned design and to have high interest It is focused on whether to grant. For example, when it is in a situation where fluctuation display of “special symbol” cannot be started, it has a function to hold the fluctuation display when a game ball enters the start opening, and performs an effect related to the hold display. One of the methods is to improve the interest of the game by configuring it to be obtained.

JP 2009-136435 A JP 2014-150802 A JP 2014-150882 A JP2014-213021 JP2014-233439A JP2015-77173A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, The type of display in the variable right image
When a display change effect is executed within the variable display time of certain identification information, the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold can be changed for the hold remaining within the variable display time. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the on-hold pending content transmission process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the pending content transmission process during digestion on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the pending simultaneous change management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a huge hold prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of skewering hold prefetch determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the reserved prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the first main game prefetch hold content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prefetch effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is an image diagram of simultaneous pending change effect execution on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a pre-reading effect execution image diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the on-hold pending content transmission process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the digestion pending content transmission process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of initialization command transmission determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 64 is a first example of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 65 is a second example of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 66 is an example 3 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 67 is a change example 4 of the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 68 is a fifth example of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 69 is a holding pre-reading effect change example 6 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 70 is an example 7 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 71 is an example 8 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 72 is a holding pre-reading effect change example 9 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 73 is an example 10 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 74 is an example 11 of changing the look-ahead look effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 75 is a suspend pre-reading effect change example 12 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 76 is an example 13 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 77 is an example 14 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 78 is an example 15 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 79 is a change example 16 of the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is a change example 17 of the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 81 is an example 18 of changing the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 shows a change example 19 of the pre-reading effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 83 is an example 20 of changing the look-ahead look effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “The average value is uniform regardless of the number of holds” means that the variable time is selected without depending on the number of holds, but other provisions include (1) Loss In the stop symbol “HA”, the first difference is generated between the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “a” and the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “b” that is larger than the number of holdings “a”. In the pattern “HB”, there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “a” and the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “b”, or a second difference is generated rather than the first difference, and the second (2) is assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected at the time of the stop symbol “HA” related to the loss at the number of holdings c (for example, 4 holdings). Random number range assigned to the most easily selected variation mode The occupation ratio α is assumed to be the occupation ratio α, and it is most easily selected in the random number range assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected at the time of the stop symbol “HB” related to the loss with the retention number c (for example, the retention number 4). When the proportion of the random number range assigned to the variation mode is the occupation rate β, the occupation rate α is higher than the occupation rate β (that is, the variation mode that is most easily selected is concentrated and selected. Easy) value.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming state and the like are output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the second main game start port A10 is present due to the presence of the first main game start port A10. The upper part of the game start opening B10 is blocked. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10. And it is comprised so that it may be guide | induced to 2nd main game start opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port You may comprise so that A10 and 2nd main game start opening B10 may be spaced apart. In the case of such a configuration, a member for closing the upper part of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be provided. In addition, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down on the right side (based on the center of the game area) may not be guided to the first main game start port A10, but may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {but is not limited to this, and it is configured so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right of the game area D30, respectively)}.

  Next, on the upper right side of the out mouth D36, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap, and flow down to the right side of the gaming area D30 (referenced to the middle of the gaming area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first grand prize opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located at the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display with symbols or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 Turning on / off the launching device D42 that launches each ball, the launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch, is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Here, although not particularly illustrated, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured not to provide an unused area in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is preferable (for example, all unused areas are filled with zeros, and used areas are filled in young addresses and written). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent behavior, unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable that the data is not provided. Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used at a young address and an unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoids (not shown) such as the first big prize winning solenoid C13, the second big prize winning solenoid C23, etc., information display LEDs (not shown), etc. that are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown). . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. And the game progress means MP that manages the current and past game states [e.g., state relating to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability varying game state, time-reduced game state), special game state}, state relating to the auxiliary game (Easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game status during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing, and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 Jackpots, loses}, information on variation modes (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} for transmitting information transmission control means MT (and unsent commands) A command transmission buffer MT10), and a winning ball payout determining means MH for controlling the winning ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined winning ball based on winning of game balls to various winning holes. Yes.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progression means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for performing control to change and stop each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10. Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game advantageous to the player over the normal game, and a first main game Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, the determination of which game state the current game state is to be transferred to and the first grand prize without the change of the game state (probability variation game state, time-reduced game state) It has a small hit game control means MP40 that manages the execution of a small hit game that can open the mouth C10, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the determination. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a second main game start entrance. The second main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and the auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 In the first winning prize entrance determining means MJ11-C10 and the second winning prize opening C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning prize opening C10. And a second grand prize opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult to be predicted by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of a method for generating a next random number using a random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is granted. -It is determined whether to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, and the random number is given the symbol variation permission based on the determination result The second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game acquired in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not granted It is determined whether or not the random number is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted. And have.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN makes a special game if the result of the lottery is a winning lottery means MN10 for lottery of whether or not the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is open. Special game transition determining means MN20 for determining the transition of each symbol, for example, symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number Based on the above, the variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol, and the limited frequency variation mode determination for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the main game symbol at the limited frequency described later. Means MN52. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B, and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / losing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. Further, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a table that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol at the limited frequency, such as the game state and the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game. The reference frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta composed of a plurality of tables configured to determine the table to be referred to, and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta at the time of the limit frequency A is referred to. Which of the limited frequency counter AMN52c that counts the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game and the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to be referred to at the time of the frequency B To determine the number of times the main game symbol has changed since the end of the special game. A pointer BMN52c-2, has a limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information relating to limited frequency (the flag on or off, etc.). When the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table). When referring to MN51ta-B), (1) refer to a common table and change the selection rate of the variation mode (that is, the variation mode itself to be selected is the same, but the selection rate is different), (2) Although the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, a further fixed value is added to the variation time value related to the selected variation mode. (3) Different variation mode {first main game variation mode There is a variation mode that does not exist in the determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), (4) all variations that can be selected May be configured to like is different. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Here, the limited frequency means that the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state (a limited frequency state, that is, a state in which a special variation pattern table is selected only during a specific variation period) that is different from the type and / or selection rate. In addition to the specific symbol being stopped, the limited frequency state is triggered by the opening of the big winning opening, the stop of the symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol, etc.) that triggers the opening of the big winning opening, or a certain timing. The passage of a predetermined number of fluctuations or the like may be made from (a timing such as a specific symbol stop, a change start after the stop, etc.). The special variation pattern table refers to each gaming state (probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, non-probability variation gaming. Main game table 3 referenced in the state and non-time-reduced gaming state (not only in a limited period in the current gaming state, but in the next big hit, small hit or a specific symbol of the current gaming state It is a variation mode determination lottery table other than the variation mode determination lottery table referred to until the stop. The state referring to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta is hereinafter referred to as the limited frequency (particularly, the one involving the state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easily opened). At the time of frequency A, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be called a limited frequency state, during a limited frequency, etc.

  Here, when executing the lottery determination based on the main game random number, the success / failure lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any one of all the winning random number values, If some or all of the random number values are continuous numbers, the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the hit random number value and is determined to determine whether it is greater than or equal to the lower limit value. . By executing such determination as to whether or not it is correct, accurate determination processing can be executed. On the contrary, when the determination is made by comparison with only the upper limit of the hit random number range, or only with the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) needs to be a random number value, making it vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent action of passing current through the main control board M, where all bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of end. In this example, one lottery is executed using one random number {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Because it needs to be prevented from synchronizing}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 and the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number) and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, for the normal game → the first main game normal game state). Lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H which is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), And auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal (Game state lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the gaming state (for example, regarding the gaming state, normal game → second main game normal game) State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling to stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening / closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game start port electric player B11d -B.

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) Details are not shown).

  Next, the small hit game control means MP40 is a small hit game timer MP41t for measuring the opening time of the first big prize opening C10 in the small hit game, and the small hit game related information for temporarily storing information related to the small hit game. Temporary storage means MP40b.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. Has a short-time game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the short-time game end condition determining means MP52 has a short-time number counter MP52c capable of counting the short-time number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). Also, the time-reduced game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time limit restriction). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. (A so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbols (auxiliary game symbols for which the change start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 that controls the information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 for executing the hold prefetch effect, background effect display control means SM23 that controls background image determination processing and display control processing, notification effect content determination processing, and It has a notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the display control process, and a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the determination process of the reach effect contents and the display control process.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information relating to the hold related to the decorative design.

  Next, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 is a hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k that determines whether or not the hold prefetch effect can be executed, and a prefetch related information temporary storage means SM26b that temporarily stores information related to the hold prefetch. ,have.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores information related to the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. Background production related information temporary storage means SM23b for the stay stage {a group of production systems, and the stay stage is different, the notice production, the background production, the reach production, the sound mode, etc. (or may be different) , The awake stage stay counter SM23c that measures the number of fluctuations staying in the “wake stage” and the “devil stage” among the stay stages. And a devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 for measuring the number of fluctuations staying at the “devil stage”. .

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and display timing of the notice effect, and the information related to the notice effect display. Is temporarily stored in advance notice related information SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is based on information from the main control board M side, reach effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). . Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and the reset button (RAM clear) Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  It should be noted that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured not to be a value at which a special game is executed (immediately after starting the program processing, noise or fraudulent behavior). In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining whether to execute the special game has been executed.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determining means MH) receives the winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is executed and processing for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed. In the control command transmission process, the order of receiving commands on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball enters (inflow, passes in the case of a gate) at the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held, in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 or step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than in the case of being off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sends the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) related to the variable time is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. In step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning”. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric character in the start opening electric member release timer MP22t-B. Second). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric player opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the electric player's opening time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily turns the auxiliary game state temporarily. The open flag of the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process proceeds to (Step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start entrance entrance information from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. Is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and determines the main game (especially the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage unit MP40b, and executes the special game execution flag and the small hit execution flag. It is determined whether or not is off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the hold control means MJ30 pre-determines the result of the stored hold and the stop symbol based on the hold information (the lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1316, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command relating to the newly generated hold success / failure result and stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1318. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information related to the stop symbol determined in advance is transmitted to the sub-side, the prior determination result is the stop symbol related to the loss of the first main game “HA”. In the case of “HB”, a command related to a stop symbol different from that in the case of “HB” is transmitted to the sub-side (as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of stop symbols related to loss. ing).

  Next, in step 1318, the hold control means MJ30, based on the hold information (variation mode determination random number), the stored change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group (non-short-time change mode group and time-change mode) (Group) is determined in advance (refer to the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17 for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group). In the present embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number separator information, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1322. If the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the present embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as an effect to be executed on the sub side. It is desirable that the player can be notified of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is a big hit (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit). In the case of No in step 1302, step 1304, step 1310, or step 1312, the process proceeds to step 1322.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the suspension occurs), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group Is configured to determine.

  In addition, it may be configured to transmit the main game content determination random number information, the failure random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the variation mode group information to the sub side at the timing when the hold occurs, The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, but information related to the main game symbols that are stopped, information related to the main game symbols that are jackpots (number of special game rounds related to the main game symbols scheduled to stop, etc.) ), The number of holdings immediately after the winning of the holding (the number of holdings on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side may be only the holding number of both the first main game side and the second main game side) May be configured to transmit information related to the {the failure random number delimiter information refers to each gaming state and random number value (or random value range) on the first main game side (second main game side) And the lottery results are grouped together. This is one piece of random number separator information. If it is a floating game state, it is a win, but if it is a non-stochastic variable game state, a grouping such as losing can be given}.

  Next, in step 1322, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B enters the second main game start entrance entrance from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. It is determined whether information is received. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1324, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in Step 1328, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1330, the hold control unit MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage unit MP40b, and executes the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag. Whether or not is on is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the hold control means MJ30 pre-determines the result of the stored hold and the stop symbol based on the hold information (the random determination random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the hold control unit MJ30 sets the newly generated hold result and stop command information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for sending to the sub-main control unit SM (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1338.

  In the case of No in step 1330, in step 1332, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether or not the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage unit MB30b is off. If Yes in step 1332, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1332, the process proceeds to step 1334.

  Next, in step 1338, the hold control means MJ30 determines, based on the hold information (variation mode determining random number), the stored change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group (the non-short-time change mode group and the time-change mode). (Group) is preliminarily determined (refer to the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17 for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group). Next, in step 1340, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to a new hold occurrence (such as a hold occurrence command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number separator information) to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400).

  In step 1308 and step 1328, storage of the first main game content determination random number and storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. Is stored, and only the information related to the “main game content determination random number” is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure such that other information such as value is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like) To prevent it). In addition, with respect to the winning lottery random number, the change of the gaming state (from the gaming state related to the hold that has already been recorded) between the acquisition of the winning lottery random number and the execution of the winning lottery related to the winning lottery random number. Since not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of the lottery execution related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable). Until the process is executed, the lottery random number is stored. In the present embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only at the time of the hold occurrence related to the first main game in the non-time-saving game state, while in the time-saving game state. Is configured so that it can be transmitted only at the time of the occurrence of the hold related to the second main game, but regardless of whether the hold is related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game in any game state The command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may determine whether to use the received command. The specific example of the command relating to the result information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D000H: out of order, D001H: out of low probability, hit out with high accuracy, D002H: hit out with both low accuracy and high accuracy, D003H Is a small hit, and a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D100H: 16R probability variation, D101H: 16R non-accuracy variation, D102H: 2R probability variation”, A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted to the main control unit SM is “D200H: delimiter 1 (group 1 for time-reduced gaming state, group 1 for non-time-reduced gaming state, group 1 for limited frequency state)” , D201H: Break 2 (Group 1 for time-reduced gaming state, Group 2 for non-time-reduced gaming state, Group 1 for limited frequency state -Loop 1), D202H: has separated 3 (time saving game state if Group 2, Group 2 for non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or while the condition device is operating), is not changing the main game symbol, is holding the main game symbol, and is not in the small hit game Is a condition. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is fixedly displayed), during the variable fixed time, the fluctuation start condition for the next variable You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, in Step 1408, the winning / not determining lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming winning / not determining lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming notifying lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and the first main Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the game state cannot be changed is illustrated, but a small hit may not occur (winning for the small hit) may be configured. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of losing symbols on the first main game side (in this example, two types of “HA” and “HB”), while a single losing symbol on the second main game side ( In this example, “HC”) is present. Note that the number of lost symbols on the first main game (second main game) side is merely an example, and is not limited to this (for example, the number of lost symbols on the first main game side is three or more. The losing symbol on the first main game side may be singular and the losing symbol on the second main game side may be plural, or the losing symbol may be plural on both the first main game side and the second main game side. ). In this example, the loss pattern on the first main game side is configured such that the ratio of “HA” is higher than the ratio of “HB”, but is not limited to this (for example, “HB” The ratio may be configured to be higher than the ratio of “HA”, or these may be set to an equivalent ratio).

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) determines the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination). Referring to the lottery table MN41ta-B), the stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game symbol determination result lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “3A, 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A” and “3B, 4B, 5B, 7B "), one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In addition, the number of special games rounds determined by referring to the main game symbol and the opening time of the big prize opening are 3A, 3B and 4B for 2R short opening big hits (compared to the long opening big hit for the big winning opening time) 4A, 5A, 9A and 5B are 4R long open big hits (big hits where the opening time of the big prize opening is longer than short open big hits), 7A and 7B Is a 16R long open big hit (a big hit where the opening time of the big prize opening is longer than the short open big hit). Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are merely examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, in this embodiment, there are two types of lost symbols on the first main game side (“HA” and “HB”). 2 types), one type (one type of “HC”) is provided on the second main game side, but is not limited to this, both on the first main game side and the second main game side, A plurality of types of losing symbols may be provided, or any one of the losing symbols on the first main game side and the second main game side may be configured.

  Next, in step 1412, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and the limited frequency It is determined whether or not the A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1450, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) performs a limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later, Control goes to step 1418. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1414, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) determines the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. , It is determined whether or not the limited frequency B flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1500, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) performs a limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later, Control goes to step 1418. In the case of No in step 1414, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) determines the first main game variation corresponding to each game state. With reference to the mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) Based on (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to Step 1418.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) (note that In this figure, not only the main game table 3 but also the limited frequency table is shown at the same time, which will be described later). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol variation mode (variation time) for a certain random value can be determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short flag state. Has been. For example, for a certain random number value, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short-time flag is on (time-short game) The state) is configured to easily determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short-time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side Is configured to be advantageous for the player, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). It is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished in order to establish the situation.

  In addition, as shown in this figure (particularly, FIG. 15), in this example, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, the result of lottery determination is lost and determined in the non-time-reduced gaming state (in the case of pending digestion). When the symbol to be stopped is “HA”, it is easy to select a variation mode that has a short time (in this example, a variation time of 15 seconds or less) (that is, an effect with a relatively low expectation of big hit is selected). (Easy). On the other hand, in this example, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, if the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, it is more relative than when the determined symbol is “HA”. Therefore, it is easy to select a variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot), and the variation time to be selected is The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, compared to the case where the determined symbol is “HA” A predetermined variation mode that becomes a long time (for example, a variation mode that becomes 120 seconds) is easily selected. In addition, you may comprise so that it may have two or more types of stop symbols related to the loss on the second main game side, and in such a case, the above-described configuration (configuration related to “HA” and “HB”) is the second main game. You may apply to the stop symbol which concerns on the game side lose.

  Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN sends the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The information related to the determined main game symbol such as the variation mode information and the command related to the current gaming state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999) (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display part A21g (first main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428. If No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1436, in step 1440, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1550. In the case of No in step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, at step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1600). Even in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 10 (in this embodiment, the limited frequency A is the second main game start as described above. The frequency is limited with the fact that the mouth electric accessory B11d is in a state of being easily opened). First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value is a continuation enable / disable value (the state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easy to open = time shortening game). In this example, it is determined whether or not the value is 41 and 1). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-1), and uses the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. Based on this, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1458. Here, the continuation permission / prohibition value is a counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c at which the time-reduced gaming state can be ended, and in this embodiment, the number of time reductions that can be given after the end of the special game is 20 times or 60 times. The count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c becomes a continuation allowance value before the start of the 20th and 60th fluctuations from the end of the special game.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-1). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table is set when the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is a continuation allowance value (41 or 1 in this example). Reference is made to A-1.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-2), and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery. As a result, based on the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 1458.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-2). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is other than the continuation allowance value (41 or 1 in this example). Reference is made to Table A-2.

  Next, at step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, at step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1460, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and performs the next processing (in step 1418). Process). In the case of No in step 1460, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 (the limited frequency B is the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d as described above. Is a limited frequency that is difficult to open). First, in step 1502, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table B), and uses the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, and the stop symbol related to the main game symbol. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined. Next, at step 1504, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, in step 1506, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and performs the next processing (in step 1418). Process). In the case of No in step 1506, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

  Here, the limited frequency table B shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table B is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is on.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17, the variation mode random number separation information and the variation mode determination lottery table according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in the figure, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode random number separation information is determined for a certain random number value (or random value range). The variation mode random number delimiter information is provided in each table when the first main game side is hit (when lost) and when the second main game side is hit (when lost). More specifically, when the second main game side loses, it is divided into two divisions of division 1 to division 2 (the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is division 1, the main game The variation mode in which the variation time of the symbol can be the longest is division 2), and it is divided into three divisions at the time of the first main game side hit and the second main game side hit (the main game symbol of The variation mode in which the variation time can be the shortest is demarcation 1, and the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the longest is delimitation 3). (The variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is demarcation 1, and the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol is the longest is delimiter 4) .

  In addition, the main game short time flag is turned on / off, and whether the table to be referred to is a normal (non-limited frequency) variation mode determination table or a limited frequency table {a limited frequency flag (a limited frequency A flag or ON / OFF of the (limited frequency B flag) (further, regarding the limited frequency A flag, whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter A is a predetermined value)} The range is different (for example, the range of the random number value is different even in the same group 1), and the fluctuation mode random number separator information is transmitted to the sub-side, so that the fluctuation according to these gaming states The aspect group is configured to be derivable on the sub side. That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variation mode group that was planned at the time of the occurrence of the hold and the change mode group that is executed at the time of the hold can be different. (For example, the change mode group was scheduled to be group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state at the time of the onset of hold, but the actual change mode group became group 2 because the time-reduced game state was reached at the time of deferring the hold. The fluctuation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all the gaming states is obtained at the time when the variable mode random number delimiter information is received on the sub-side (the subsequent gaming state) It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold prefetch effect without considering the transition. Note that “common” in FIGS. 14 to 17 in the present embodiment means that the table content has a common variation time, variation mode, etc., but (1) the variation mode is different and the variation time value. Are the same, (2) the same performance mode is performed, (3) the same performance mode regardless of the gaming state (for example, regardless of the gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state) Although the processing (assignment of variation pattern number, etc.) on the main control board M is different, the production mode may be “common” that is substantially the same. Moreover, you may comprise so that the candidate of the variation aspect which can be selected and / or the number of candidates may differ with a stop symbol (decision symbol). Further, the variation mode random number separator information of FIGS. 14 to 17 depends on whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and whether or not the lottery result is win or miss. Although it was configured to form different variation mode random number separation information, it is not limited to this, whether it is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, and whether or not the lottery result is a win It may be configured to form one variation mode random number delimiter information including a loss.

  Moreover, as shown in this figure, in this example, it is comprised so that variation time may differ according to the number of pending | holding. For example, regarding the first main game symbol variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the result of the lottery is lost and the loss symbol is “HA”, the variation mode determination table content referred to according to the number of holds on the first main game side (The contents of the variation mode determination table referred to when the number of holds is 0 to 1 and when the number of holds is 2 to 3 are changed). In other words, when the winning symbol is “HA” when the lottery result is lost, the variation time (and the production mode) may be different depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation. ) Can be indeterminate}, but if the winning symbol is “HB” when the result of the lottery is lost, the variation time (and the production mode) regardless of the number of holdings at the time of holding ) Can be determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and the number of reservations used as a reference for switching the contents of the change mode determination table can be changed as appropriate (for example, three divisions of 0, 1 to 2, 3 or 0) -It may be divided into four pieces of 1 piece, 2 pieces, 3 pieces, etc.). In addition, in the case where the result of the lottery is lost, both the case where the determined symbol is “HA” and the case where it is “HB” are configured such that the variation time can be different depending on the number of holdings at the start of the variation. May be. As a configuration example in such a configuration, (1) the difference between the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 2-3 Configuration in which “HB” is smaller than “HA” in the case where the decision symbol is “HA” (2) In the case where the decision symbol is “HB” than in the case where the decision symbol is “HA” It is good also as a structure with a high probability (a random number range is wide) that a fluctuation | variation aspect (fluctuation time) is determined without being dependent.

  Here, in this example, with respect to the symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state, if the result of lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, the number of holds is 0 to 1. In this case, when the random number is “0 to 799”, the group 1 is obtained. When the random number is “800 to 1023”, the group 2 is obtained. Is “0 to 899”, the group is 1, and when the random number is “900 to 1023”, the group is 2. Therefore, when the random number value is “0 to 799”, the variation mode group is determined as group 1, and when the random number value is “900 to 1023”, the variation mode group is determined as group 2. Is “800 to 899”, it is unclear whether the variation mode group will be group 1 or group 2 until the suspension of digestion. In other words, when the determination pattern when the result of the lottery is lost is “HA”, a random number value (or a random value range) in which the variation mode group can be uniquely determined (in this example, “0 to 0”). 799 ”or“ 900-1023 ”) and a random value (or random value range) in which the variation mode group is not easily determined (in this example, a random value of“ 800 to 899 ”). Therefore, when performing a pre-reading effect for a hold whose decision symbol is “HA” when the winning / losing lottery result is lost, to which change mode group the change actually belongs at the time of hold reservation It may be necessary to determine the number of suspensions for determining. In addition, it is preferable that the prefetch lottery is executed when the newly generated pending variation mode group is a random value (or a random value range) that can be uniquely determined. (For example, when the random number related to a certain hold is “900 to 1023”, any number of the remaining holds at the time of digestion of the given hold. However, since it is “group 2”, if the reach effect is configured to be executed in the variation mode group of “group 2”, when the certain hold occurs, the decision regarding the certain hold is made. Even if the symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, it is possible to execute the hold prefetch effect = the reach effect will eventually occur. Only does not occur inconsistency be executed pending read-ahead performance of).

  In this example, the variation time included in each group is within the same range of variation time (for example, group 1 has a variation time of 15 seconds or less regardless of whether or not it is in a time-saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation time that can be selected is completely different (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time of 10 to 120 seconds is selected and the time In a shortened gaming state, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds and 10 seconds is selected). In this case, a variation state group is not separated by an absolute variation time that does not depend on the gaming state. The variation mode group is divided according to the relative variation time in the middle (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation with a variation time of 10 to 15 seconds is changed in the group 1, and the time-reduced gaming state Time Group 1 variation of 1.5 seconds, and isolate) as may be configured. Moreover, it is not limited to dividing a group according to a change time, for example, group information (for example, one of a plurality of reach effects in which character A appears is executed) Is a range information obtained by dividing a variation that executes any one of the plurality of reach effects where character B appears as a group B, that is, a big hit when the reach effect is executed. Information linked to the degree of expectation) may be transmitted to the sub-side.

  According to the configuration of this example, in a certain hold that is a pre-reading production target, when the gaming state can be different between the timing at which the certain hold occurs and the timing at which the certain hold is consumed (for example, the certain hold) It is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect in consideration of a case where the gaming state shifts (such as when the hold digested earlier is a big hit). More specifically, regarding a certain hold that occurred in the probability variation gaming state, when the non-probability variation gaming state occurs at the timing of the certain hold, the variation mode group included in the variation mode random number separator information regarding the certain hold is , All belong to a group with a high expectation value (even if the game state changes, the target hold expectation degree can be maintained), or the same variation mode in the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state When it becomes a group, it is possible to execute a pre-reading effect relating to the certain hold, and a group having a low expected value when a non-probability variation gaming state is referred to as a variation mode group included in the variation mode random number separator information related to the certain hold (There is a possibility that the expectation of the target hold will be lowered by changing the gaming state), or non-probability variation gaming state If the different fluctuation mode group and a rate change gaming state, and infeasible prefetching effect related to the certain pending, it can be an equal.

  In addition, as examples in which the game state transitions in this way and the planned variation mode group and the variation mode group that is actually executed may differ, (1) there are a plurality of holds in the main game hold In a situation where a certain hold in the main game hold is digested and becomes a big hit (or small hit), the game state changes after the special game related to the hold (or after the bonus game related to the small hit) ( For example, transition from a non-stochastic variation gaming state to a probability variation gaming state), and the variation mode group of the suspension in the main game suspension remaining at the time of digestion of the certain suspension, (2) end of the special game After that (or after the end of the small hit), the game state transitions when the main game symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times (for example, the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game, the main game symbol 50 times after the end of the special game It is configured to be able to transition to a non-time-reduced gaming state at the time of movement, etc., and the holding that occurred before the end of the change of the main game symbol of the predetermined number of times after the special game ends (or after the small hit end), An example in which the variation mode group may be different when digested after the completion of the predetermined number of main game symbols after the end of the special game, (3) When the game state is a probability variation game state, By configuring a lottery (so-called falling lottery) to shift to a non-stochastic variable gaming state for each change, trigger hold occurs in the probability variable gaming state, An example in which the variation mode group may be different is given.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the same variation mode group (for example, the group 1 when the main game short time flag is on and the group when the main game short time flag is off are turned on and off by the main game short time flag. 1), the random number ranges included in the same variation mode group may be different, and the variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second main random number division information including only the different random number ranges). There are a plurality of hitting breaks 1) in the game variation mode determination lottery table. Also, variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second main mode) consisting only of the range of random numbers included in both cases where the main game short time flag within the range of random numbers of the same variation mode group is on or off. There is also a break 3) for hitting the game variation mode determination lottery table. Note that the number of types of variation mode random number delimiter information in each table (for example, four of delimiter 1 to delimiter 4 at the time of losing the first main game variation mode determination lottery table) is the number of types of variation mode groups (For example, three groups 1 to 3 at the time of losing the first main game variation mode determination lottery table).

  Further, in the present embodiment, group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups can be selected as a variation mode group only when it is scheduled to have a variation time of a predetermined time or more (in this example, 60 seconds or more). It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode group is selected, the variation time becomes relatively long {in other words, the expectation of being a big hit becomes high (the variation mode that can be selected). The ratio of the inner jackpot will be high)}. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the group 3 may be configured to be more easily selected (in the range of random numbers) in the non-time-reduced game state than in the time-reduced game state. In the gaming state (especially in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), it is possible to easily select a variation with a short variation time, thereby reducing the time required for the next big hit, Can reduce stress. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easy to open, it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10, and a situation where there is no holding is unlikely to occur} . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that the group 3 is more easily selected when the time is in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-time-reduced gaming state. In the shortened game state), the game state is more advantageous to the player than in the non-time-reduced game state, and therefore it is effective to use the highly expected performance to raise the player's expectation}. Moreover, the policy regarding grouping of the variation mode groups may be changed as appropriate. The number of groups and the number and types of variation modes (variation times) belonging to each group are not limited to the above examples. Absent. For example, in this example, those belonging to group 3 (group C) are “scheduled to have a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or longer”, but in addition to this, “the fluctuation time that is the longest time that can be selected” It may be “scheduled to be”, “an average value of variation modes (variation times) belonging to the group is a predetermined time or more”, or “a big hit is determined”. In addition, a variation mode is associated with an effect mode (for example, a loss effect, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect 1, a super reach effect 2, a jackpot confirmed super reach effect, etc.) executed by the sub-main control unit SM. You may comprise so that a group may be separated (a variation aspect group corresponding to a loss effect, a variation aspect group corresponding to a normal reach effect,..., A big hit fixed super reach effect corresponding variation aspect group).

  In the present embodiment, the random time that the variation time group and the variation mode group have depends on whether the main game short time flag is on or off, and whether the table to be referenced is a normal variation mode determination table or a limited frequency table. The range of random numbers of the variation time and / or variation mode group varies depending on whether the gaming state is a non-stochastic variation gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, etc. You may comprise so that it may obtain.

  In this example, in the second main game variation mode determination table, a specific variation mode that can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a jackpot symbol in the non-probability variation state and the non-time-reduced game state. (In this example, it is configured to have a variation mode in which the variation time is 40 seconds). With this configuration, when a specific effect is selected, the player can also recognize that the second main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, so whether or not the specific effect is executed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game by making the production diverse, such as performing the production. This example is merely an example. For example, in the non-probability variation state and the non-time-reduced game state, the reach effect can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, while the second main game is selected. When the symbol is a lost symbol, only the non-reach effect may be executed. Similarly, in another gaming state (probability variation state and non-time shortened gaming state or limited frequency state), a specific reach effect (or reach effect) is also given only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. It may be configured to be selected.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variation mode on the first main game side, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, it is referred to in the non-time-reduced gaming state. Contents of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table and the limited frequency table B that is referenced when the limited frequency B flag is on (in this example, for example, when winning a small hit) (For example, the variation time and variation mode group corresponding to the random value) are the same. That is, in this embodiment, even if the variation pattern table is changed on the first main game side, if it is a non-time-reduced gaming state, it is a lost symbol (in this example, “HA” The same table structure may be used for “HB” (the change time corresponding to the random number value, the change mode group, whether or not the change mode depends on the number of holds, etc.) so that they can be the same. It is configured. Note that this example is merely an example, and it is possible to have a configuration in which the contents of the table related to the lost symbol can be changed (or can be the same) depending on whether or not the game is in the probability variation gaming state, or the second main game side You may provide the same structure in a fluctuation | variation aspect.

  Further, in this example, even if the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbols are the same (“HA” or “HB”), different variation modes can be selected depending on the gaming state. ing. For example, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, when the result of lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the variation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-reduced gaming state. While it is configured so that only the effects described above are selected, if the game is in the time-reduced gaming state, an effect whose variation time is 5 seconds can be selected (specifically, the non-time-reduced gaming state) In this case, it is configured such that an effect with a short variation time is easily selected as compared to the case of the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side where the winning / failing lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA”, when the game is in the time-reduced game state, the game is in the non-time-reduced game state Compared to the above, it is configured such that the variation mode having a short variation time (5 seconds in this example) is relatively easily selected. This example is an example, and even when the gaming state is different, the same variation mode (more specifically, for example, the variation time) is selected when the determined symbols are the same. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, when the determined symbol is “HA”, the variation mode (variation time) may be different depending on the number of holds when the game is in the non-time-reduced gaming state {variation mode (variation time) May depend on the number of holds} On the other hand, when the game is in a time-saving gaming state, the variation mode (variation time) is not different depending on the number of holds. Further, when the determined symbol is “HB”, the variation mode (variation time) does not differ depending on the number of holds regardless of the gaming state.

  Note that this example is merely an example. When the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the non-probability variation gaming state and non- The selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is long (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) may be different depending on the time-reduced game state {more specifically, the probability variation game In the state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, it may be configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more). Good}. Similarly, when the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, the game is in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state. And the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be different {more specifically, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state In this case, the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be increased or decreased}.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when the result of lottery is lost, the determined symbol is “HA”, and the game is in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time on the first main game side is the variation time. Are configured to have different groups depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, even if the determined symbol is “HA”, in the variation mode on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state, the variation time (and the production mode) regardless of the number of suspensions at the time of suspension ) Can be determined. This example is merely an example. For example, when the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HA” (“HB”), the gaming state (whether it is a probability variation state and / or Regardless of whether or not the game is in a time-reduced gaming state), the variation time (and production mode) may differ depending on the number of holds at the beginning of the variation {or in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game side decides When the symbol is “HB”, it may be configured so that it can be determined in one variation time (and production mode) regardless of the number of holdings at the time of holding.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a hold where the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, the selection tendency of the variation mode may be different depending on the number of the hold at the time of digestion of the hold related to the “HA”. The change mode random number delimiter information is configured so that the change mode group may or may not be different depending on the number of holds at the time of digestion of the hold related to the “HA”. In addition, in the case of a hold where the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HB”, it is reconstituted that the selection tendency of the variation mode is not different depending on the number of holds when the hold related to “HB” is digested. Let me supplement.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, at step 1552, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1574, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time / count counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time / count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1574, in step 1576 and step 1578, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. The process proceeds to (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600) also in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570 or step 1574.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30, the special game flag (main game probability change flag, main game short flag, auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, at step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1608, the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, at step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). In the case of No in step 1602, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1702, in Steps 1704 and 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 opens the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in an open pattern (for example, stop of the main game symbol). If the symbol is 3A, 3B or 4B, the opening pattern of “0.2 second open → 1.0 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed”, the main game stop symbol is 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A, In the case of 5B or 7B, an “open pattern of 29.0 seconds open → close” is set. Next, in step 1716, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d) of the first big prize opening C10 to make the first big prize. The mouth C10 (or the second grand prize opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds), and the process proceeds to Step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes in steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. ) Is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) to determine the predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) relating to the special prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. If No in step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1800).

  Next, in step 1728, the special game executing means MP33 determines the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (particularly an open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800). In the case of No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probable big hit symbol (after the execution of the special game is finished, the probability variation game state is reached). It is a big hit symbol to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether it is 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, that is, in the case where the stop symbol is a non-probable variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game is finished, in this example, 4A / 4B) 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probable change / time and jackpot symbol (the probability change after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is the awakening stage probability change / short-time hit symbol (this example) Then, it is determined whether or not 5A · 3B). Note that the awakening stage probability change / short-time jackpot symbol is the awakening stage (a stage where the player can be informed of whether or not the player is in a probability-variable gaming state at the end of the stage) after the jackpot is over. It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter AMN52. Next, in step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets the awakening stage transition command (a command related to information indicating the transition to the awakening stage) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. Note that if the result is No in step 1758, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (that is, in this example, the stop symbol is any one of 3A, 4A, and 4B), in step 1766, the specific game control means MP50 determines the first and second main game symbols. With reference to the temporary information storage means MB11b-C, the stop symbol is a non-probable change / short-time big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to a non-stochastic variable game state and a time-reduced game state after the execution of the special game. In this example, 4A -It is determined whether it is 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1766, in step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the number of hours and hours based on the big hit symbol to the counter value of the hour and hour number counter MP52c (the time and number of times can be different depending on the type of big hit symbol For example, when the stop symbol 4A is further subdivided into 4A-1 and 4B-1, it is 20 times in the case of 4A-1 or 4B-1, and in the case of 4A-2 or 4B-2. Is 60 times, etc.) Thus, in this example, in the big hit symbol belonging to the 4A symbol (4B symbol), 4A-1 (4B-1) having 20 time reductions and 4A-2 (60 time reductions) 4B-2) is included, but the type of jackpot symbol and the type of time reduction are not limited to this, and other types of time reduction (eg, time reduction 40 times) 4A- 3 (4B-3) may be further provided, and the number of time reductions in each of the exemplified jackpot symbols and 4A-1 and 4A-2 (4B-1 and 4B-2) in the 4A symbol (4B symbol) ) Ratio and the like can be changed as appropriate. Next, in step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the same value (20 times or 60 times) as the number of time reductions set in the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c in the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, at step 1772, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1774, the specific game control means MP50 sets the command related to the awakening stage transition command and the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1778. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1766 {that is, when the stop symbol is a latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example)}, in step 1776, the specific game control means MP50 stores the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether or not at least one of the main game probability change flag and the main game short time flag is on at the time of winning the big hit. If Yes in step 1776, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  Next, in step 1778 and step 1780, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1776 {that is, when the main game probability change flag and the main game short time flag are off (normal game state)}, in step 1782, the specific game control means MP50 receives the devil stage transition command (devil stage) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). After the special game related to the “3A” symbol won in the normal game state, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state, and after the small hit game selected in the normal game state, the normal game state In any case, it is configured to execute substantially the same effects. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (small hit game) related to the “3A” symbol or the small hit symbol has been executed (so-called “latent state” is created), and the interest of the game is enhanced. It will be improved.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If YES in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 stores an open pattern (in this example, the first big prize similar to the execution of the special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol in the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. The opening / closing pattern of the mouth C10, for example, 0.2 second open → 1.0 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed) is set. Next, at step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first big winning opening C10 and starts a small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 is a special game start display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game is a special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol. Since it is the same as the effect mode during the game, the command is the same as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1812. In the present embodiment, in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state (normal game state), when the small hit or the latent probability change big hit is won, the first big winning opening C10 during the small hit game is opened. By making the mode and the production mode the same as during the special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol, and also making the stay stage executed after the end of the small hit game and the special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol the same, It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (or small hit game) related to the big hit symbol of the hit symbol or the latent probability change big hit symbol has been executed (so-called a latent state is created), improving the interest of the game It will be made to.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 1811, the process proceeds to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the first big prize opening winning detection device C11s, and determines whether or not there is a win (ball) in the first big prize opening C10. In the case of Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls in the first big winning opening C10. It is determined whether or not there was. If Yes in step 1814, the process proceeds to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t for a predetermined time (in this example, 0 for example) 2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 1.4 seconds related to closing) is determined. If YES in step 1816, the process proceeds to step 1818.

  Next, at step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops the driving of the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d and closes the first big prize opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, at step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, at step 1823, the small hit game control means MP40 is a special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub-side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game is a special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol. Since it is the same as the effect mode during the game, the command is the same as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (step In 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to Step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game probability change flag and the main game short time flag are off (normal game state). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the main game symbol that is stopped is the short hit small hit symbol {in this example, 1K, It is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations to which the limited frequency table is referred after the end of the small hit game is smaller than the long count small hit symbol (2K)}. In the case of Yes in Step 1828, in Step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to a short number (10 times), and proceeds to Step 1834. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1828, in Step 1832, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the limited number of times (30 times) in the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2, and proceeds to Step 1834. Next, in step 1834, the small hit game control means MP40 transmits a devil stage transition command and a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 (command to the sub side) to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1811, Step 1816, or Step 1824, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1997). In this embodiment, the first prize winning opening C10 is set to be the first winning prize opening C10 during the small hit game execution. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The second winning prize opening C20 may be the second winning prize opening C20. In such a case, the winning prize opening opened during the execution of the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example) is also the second winning prize opening C20. It is preferable to do.

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is stored). If received, the sub-side RAM is initialized, various information commands are received, and the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM indicates that the trigger is on hold (the hold on winning the pre-read lottery at the time of winning) from the information relating to the hold temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information is deleted (if there is no hold with information indicating that the trigger is on hold, this processing is not executed and the processing proceeds to the next processing), and the hold display mode is all white. Display (reset the process related to the pre-reading effect). In addition, the process at the time of a power interruption is not limited to this, It is comprised so that pre-reading production can be continued without deleting the information indicating that the trigger is on hold or the information on the hold display mode even after the power interruption is restored. May be. In such a configuration, for example, a subsidence area is provided on the sub side where information can be maintained even during power interruption, and information related to performance is backed up in the retreat area when a power interruption occurs, and power interruption recovery is performed. It may be configured to restore backed up information from time to time. In addition, it may be configured so that information related to the content of the hold is received again from the main side at the time of power failure recovery, at the start of change, at the time of change stop, at the time of occurrence of hold (even for hold other than the newly generated hold) Good {Although not specifically shown in this example, at the time of power failure recovery, only information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (information related to the contents of hold is not sent). . For this reason, since the information related to the hold that existed at the time of power interruption does not exist after the return from power interruption, the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold (the hold from the main side at the time of power interruption return) It may be configured so as to receive information related to the above, and may be configured so that a pre-reading effect can be executed for the suspension. Note that if a power interruption occurs while the decorative symbol is changing, and if it does not have a function to maintain the information at the time of the interruption, it will remain dark until it receives the change end command from the main side. A screen (for example, a screen that displays “in preparation” or the like) will be displayed}. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of (b) of the figure, first, in step 2100, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs a hold information management process to be described later. Execute. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a stay stage determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (transmits commands set in a series of these subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (eg, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to the new hold occurrence. It is determined whether or not (holding information relating to a game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, Add “1” to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily sends the new hold result and the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Remember. Next, in step 2108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information (particularly the change mode group, the change mode random number delimiter information, etc.) based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side. Temporary storage in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Note that if the main side does not transmit the information on the result of the determination, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information, the information is stored in the hold information temporary storage area in step 2106 or step 2108. Will not be temporarily stored. Next, in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2150, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning prefetch determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2200, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning prefetch determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

  Next, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the new hold has information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 executes a prefetch hold content determination process, which will be described later, and moves to step 2114 in step 2250. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2112, the process proceeds to step 2114.

  Next, in step 2114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode of hold other than the trigger hold (all holdings when there is no trigger hold in the hold) as “white”. As described above, in this embodiment, the hold display mode of the hold in which the hold display mode is not changed by the hold change effect or the hold before the change is configured to be “white”. Next, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control unit SM22 holds changes other than the trigger hold (all hold when there is no trigger hold in the hold) (when the hold display mode changes). To “None”. Thus, in this embodiment, the hold change effect related to the hold whose hold display mode does not change due to the hold change effect is “none” (the hold change effect is not executed, and the hold display mode remains “white”. It is configured as follows. Next, in step 3050, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the on-hold hold content transmission process described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and has received a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information related to the symbol change (particularly, the result of the determination, the stop symbol information, the change mode group, and the change mode random number delimiter information). While deleting from the temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining hold information is shifted. Next, in step 2124, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 3100. Next, in step 3100, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a digestion suspension content transmission process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Note that if the answer is No in step 2118, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2152, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and holds the second main game hold (first main hold within the hold). It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested in preference to the game side. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is not the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2158, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Judge whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in the pre-read lottery at the time of winning a prize (the pre-read lottery at the time of the first main game winning a prize, the pre-read lottery at the time of the second main game winning a prize). In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether there is a big hit hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2160, the process proceeds to step 2162.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2162, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning pre-read lottery to win the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example), Control goes to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HA”. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2166, in step 2168, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group 3. judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. When determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number separation information. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning pre-read lottery to win the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example), Control goes to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2166 (that is, when the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HB”), in step 2172, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is predetermined for the new hold. A winning look-ahead lottery that wins with a probability (in this example, 1/3) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2174. Thus, in the present embodiment, the prefetch lottery is more easily won when the stop symbol related to the first main game is “HB” than when it is “HA”.

  Next, in step 2174, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2174, in step 2176, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is set to “trigger hold” for the new hold won in the winning pre-read lottery in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 2112 processing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152 (when the second main game hold is present in the hold), in step 2178, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating "trigger hold" from the stored hold information (if there is no hold in the hold with information indicating that the trigger is held, this process is not executed and the next The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). It should be noted that if the result of step 2154, step 2158, step 2160, or step 2174 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). In the process of step 2178, when there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), in the second main game side priority digestion gaming machine as in this embodiment, the newly generated second main game This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations is not executed normally because the game-side suspension is consumed first, so that the planned variation order is not achieved. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery, a condition that whether or not there is a hold of a specific variation mode group (or a hold of specific variation mode random number separator information) in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition Also good. In this example, when the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is executed, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time-reduced gaming state (open time extension function is not activated). In the non-time-reduced gaming state (when the opening time extension function is in operation), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2202, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Determine whether there is no. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a big hit hold in the hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2206, the process proceeds to step 2208.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2208, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prefetch lottery for winning winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new hold, Control goes to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2208, in step 2212, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group C. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2216, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prefetch lottery for winning winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new hold, Control goes to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2220.

  Next, in step 2220, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2222, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is “trigger hold” for the new hold won in the winning pre-read lottery in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 2112 processing). It should be noted that if the result of step 2202, step 2204, step 2206, or step 2220 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). Thus, in the present embodiment, in the time-reduced gaming state, the pre-draw lottery on the second main game side can be won while the pre-draw lottery on the first main game side is not won, and the non-time In the shortened game state, the pre-drawing lottery on the first main game side can be won while the pre-drawing lottery on the second main game side is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the state where the opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (the open time extending function is activated), the second main game The pre-read lottery on the first main game side can be won while the pre-draw lottery on the first main game side is not won, and the opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is not relatively extended (open time extension function In a state in which is not operating), it may be configured such that the prefetch lottery on the first main game side can be won while the prefetch lottery on the second main game side is not won. In addition, in the following description, in the case of a configuration that has different actions in the time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the state in which the opening time extension function is activated and the opening time extension function are in operation. There is no problem even if it is replaced with a configuration that acts differently depending on the state where there is no device. In this example, as described above, when the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is executed, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time-reduced game state (open time extension function non- In the non-time-reduced gaming state (open time extension function non-actuated), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side. In addition, when the pre-reading effect on the second main game side is executed, it is a condition that the game is in the time-reduced game state (open time extension function is in operation), and the time-reduction game state (open time extension function) During operation), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the second main game side. Since it is configured in this manner, when comparing the look-ahead effect in the time-reduced gaming state (when the open time extension function is activated) and the look-ahead effect in the non-time-reduced game state (the open time extension function is activated) The first main game in the pre-play effect (or matters related to pre-read such as pre-read lottery) in the second main game side in the shortened game state (open time extension function is activated) and the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function is activated) It may be compared with the prefetching effect on the side (or matters related to prefetching such as prefetching lottery).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit). Next, in step 2256, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold change effect of the trigger hold (the effect executed when the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white”). It decides with reference to (at the time of big hit), it moves to step 2262.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2258, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing). Next, in step 2260, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold change effect of trigger hold (the effect executed when the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white”). The process proceeds to step 2262 with reference to (when lost). Next, in step 2262, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines a hold change effect execution change (symbol change that causes the hold change effect to be executed), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114). Transition. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold change effect execution variation in which the hold change effect related to the trigger hold is executed is a symbol variation related to any hold among the hold currently occurring. It is configured as follows.

  Here, of the four tables at the bottom of the figure, the upper two tables are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a loss). In the present embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold that can change at the time of execution of the hold change effect with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is “rainbow color”. , “Red”, “green”, and “blue”, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (when lost) are “red” and “green” ”And“ blue ”, which are drawn by random numbers dedicated to determining the hold display mode. It should be noted that “red” is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and “blue” is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). , The jackpot expectation for each display mode of holding when the hold change effect occurs (the ratio of the appearance rate of the big hit change to the total appearance rate of the big hit change and the loss change) is “rainbow “Color” is selected only at the time of big hit, and colors other than “rainbow” are in order of “red”, “green”, and “blue” in descending order of expectation of big hit. It should be noted that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type is changed or the color that can be changed is changed, for example, when the open extension function is inactive rather than when the open time extension function is operated. It may be configured such that the number of types of on-hold display modes increases (or in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state) than in the probability variation gaming state and the time-reduction gaming state. The configuration is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the selection ratio of the hold display mode is changed. For example, in the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), “red: blue” = “300: 324” In the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), “red: blue” = “100: 624”, “blue” is easier to select than “red” regardless of the result, but at the time of big hit You may comprise so that the difference at the time of a loss may become larger with the difference of the selection rate of the hold display mode which concerns, and the difference of the selection rate of the hold display mode which concerns at the time of a loss. Also, in this example, the display color of the hold is configured to suggest the expectation that the symbol variation related to the trigger hold becomes a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit (or The game state after the execution of the special game may be suggested in combination with the degree of expectation that is a big hit. In such a configuration, particularly in the probability variation gaming state, the display color of the suspension suggests the expectation degree to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big hit in the suspension. (For example, if the hold display color is “red”, the probability change probability is high, and if it is “blue”, the probability change probability is low, etc.), is the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player continued? It is possible to execute an effective performance that asks whether to end.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation can be different depending on the display mode selected from the plural types of hold display modes. Further, it may be configured such that the hold change effect can be executed a plurality of times during execution of the prefetch effect (from the timing of winning the prefetch lottery to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). For example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during execution of the prefetch effect, when the display mode of hold that changes in the first hold change effect is “blue”, The display mode of the hold that changes in the second hold change effect is set to “green” or “red”, that is, the hold display mode changes to a hold display mode with a high expectation level every time the hold change effect is executed. (Rank up) is desirable (in order not to impair the player's expectation). In addition, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not involve the change in the hold display may be provided. There may be provided an effect form (so-called gas pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is, and an effect form in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  Next, of the four tables at the bottom of the figure, the lower two tables are a hold change effect determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold change effect determination table (at the time of a loss). In the present embodiment, the type of effect mode that can be selected when determining the effect mode of the hold change effect with reference to the hold change effect determination table (at the time of big hit) or the hold change effect determination table (at the time of loss) is “ There are four types of change: “cut-in hold change”, “weak line hold change”, “medium line hold change”, and “strong line hold change”. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree related to the hold corresponding to the hold change effect when the hold change effect occurs (the ratio of the appearance rate of the variation that becomes the big hit to the total appearance rate of the change that becomes the big hit and the change that becomes the loss) Is configured to be different depending on the hold change effect that occurs, from the hold change effect with a high expectation of jackpot, "cut-in hold change", "strong serif hold change", "medium serif hold change", "weak serif hold "Change". It should be noted that the effect mode of the pending change effect that can be executed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type that can be changed or the color that can be changed is changed. In addition, in this example, it is configured to suggest the expectation that the symbol variation related to the trigger hold becomes a big hit by the effect mode of the hold change effect, but is not limited to this, for example, in the case of a big hit ( Alternatively, the game state after the execution of the special game may be suggested. In addition, in the same figure, it was comprised so that the jackpot expectation degree which concerns on the holding | maintenance corresponding to the said holding | maintenance change production could differ by the difference in holding | maintenance change production, but it is not limited to this, A holding change production is different Therefore, the hold change expectation degree of the hold corresponding to the hold change effect may be different (for example, when the “cut-in hold change effect” occurs, the hold display mode has a probability of 100%. , And when the “weak line hold change effect” occurs, the hold display mode changes with a probability of 20%).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the on-occurrence hold content transmission process according to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. First, in step 3052, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode in the first to second digestion order among the hold on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Next, at step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the 3rd to 4th digestion order among the hold on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first to second digestion orders among the hold on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3058, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the 3rd to 4th digestion order among the hold on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Thus, in this embodiment, the command related to the hold display mode transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side is set in four times, and “the first and second digestion order of the first main game hold → the first 3rd to 4th digestion order of 1 main game hold → 1st to 2nd digestion order of 2nd main game hold → 3rd to 4th digestion order of 2nd main game hold It is configured. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the order of setting the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS is changed. For example, “second main game hold first to second digest order → second main game hold 3 The fourth digestion order, the first and second digestion orders of the first main game hold, and the third to fourth digestion orders of the first main game hold may be configured. By configuring as such, in the gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is digested with priority over the hold on the first main game side, the command related to the hold display mode of the hold to be digested with priority is provided. It can be configured to set in advance. Note that the information related to the hold display mode includes information related to the hold display position. By configuring in this way, the display position is changed even if the hold is the same as the hold is digested. It is possible to display the hold appropriately even if it is done. In addition, when there is no corresponding hold (for example, when setting a command related to the hold display mode of hold in the third digest order related to the first main game side, there is only one hold on the first main game side In the case where no occurrence has occurred, the information related to the hold display mode is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when there is no corresponding hold, information indicating that it is not applicable (information indicating that there is no hold display mode) may be transmitted to the sub-sub side.

  Next, in step 3060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and step 2250, the hold display based on the hold display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the digestion pending content transmission process according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold change effect of the hold on the first main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS) (step 2250 and step 2). The hold change effect determined in 2116 is set). Next, in step 3104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first to second digestion orders among the holds on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the 3rd to 4th digestion order among the hold on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold change effect of the hold on the second main game side (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS) (step 2250 and The hold change effect determined in step 2116 is set). Next, in step 3110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first to second digestion orders among the hold on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the 3rd to 4th digestion order among the hold on the second main game side (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS) Become). Thus, in this embodiment, the display display mode transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side is set in four times, and “the first and second digestion orders of the first main game hold → first main game” is set. It is configured to be set in the order of “3rd to 4th digestion order of hold → 1st to 2nd digestion order of second main game hold → 3rd to 4th digestion order of second main game hold”. Yes. The order of setting the command related to the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side can be changed in the same manner as in the case of the on-hold hold content transmission process described above. For example, “second main game hold” 1st to 2nd digestion order → 3rd to 4th digestion order of 2nd main game hold → 1st to 2nd digestion order of 1st main game hold → 3 to 4 of 1st main game hold You may comprise like "the order of digestion of eyes". By configuring as such, in the gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is digested with priority over the hold on the first main game side, the command related to the hold display mode of the hold to be digested with priority is provided. It can be configured to set in advance. Note that the information related to the hold display mode includes information related to the hold display position. By configuring in this way, the display position is changed even if the hold is the same as the hold is digested. It is possible to display the hold appropriately even if it is done. In addition, when there is no corresponding hold (for example, when setting the hold display mode of hold in the third digest order related to the first main game side, only one hold on the first main game side has occurred. When there is no such information, the information related to the hold display mode is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when there is no corresponding hold, information indicating that it is not applicable (information indicating that there is no hold display mode) may be transmitted to the sub-sub side.

  Next, in step 3114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number (the command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and step 2250, the hold display based on the hold display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). In this way, in the digestion hold content transmission process to be executed at the time of hold digestion, in addition to the on-hold hold content transmission process to be executed at the time of the hold occurrence, a command related to the hold change effect is set. The process is executed (the process for setting the hold change effect is not executed when the hold occurs).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, at the time of digestion of the hold, the command related to the hold change effect of the hold on the first main game side and the command related to the hold change effect of the hold on the second main game side are set. In the set command, there is also a command indicating no action (used as collateral when a command transmission error occurs, or when the second main game side is suspended). Further, it is also configured to set a command related to the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number, and the command is set at the time of occurrence of the hold and at the time of digestion. In addition, the hold display mode of the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side is also configured to be set at the time of hold occurrence and digestion, and the hold display position changes at the time of hold digestion, A command corresponding to the subsequent hold display position is set (the command also indicates no action as described above).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Referring to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol If it is a flat eye such as “7, 7, 7” or a lost symbol, it will be “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, transmits the information relating to the stop symbols and variable aspects of decorative symbols and the determined stores temporarily reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b) the sub-sub-control unit SS. Next, in step 3150, the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes the change suggestion display mode management process described later. Next, in step 2308, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2400 processing). Transition. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). Thus, in this embodiment, it is configured to transmit the information related to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the variation mode to the sub-sub control unit SS at the time of the on-hold digestion. The information related to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the variation mode is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS at the timing after the transmission process is executed.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process according to the subroutine of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the symbol change is a symbol change related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation related to the first main game side. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side and sets it (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Be) Next, in step 3158, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines that the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side is “none” (meaning that the change suggestion display mode is not displayed). Set (command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3160, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the variation suggestion display mode on the first main game side to “none” (that the variation suggestion display mode is not displayed. (Means) and set (command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3162, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines and sets the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3164, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets the variation suggestion display mode on the first main game side to “none” (that the variation suggestion display mode is not displayed. (Means) and set (command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3166, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines that the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side is “none” (meaning that the change suggestion display mode is not displayed). Set (command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2308).

  Here, the two tables in the lower part of the figure are the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of big hit) and the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss). In the present embodiment, the variation suggestion display mode related to the trigger suspension is configured to be determined with reference to the variation suggestion display determination table. The types of variation suggestion display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the variation suggestion display determination table (at the time of big hit) are “rainbow color”, “red”, “green”, “yellow”, “blue”. , “Gray”, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the change suggestion display determination table (when lost) are “red”, “green”, “yellow”, “ There are five types of “blue” and “gray”, and the number of types of the change suggestion display mode is larger than the number of types of the hold display mode in both the big hit and the loss. In this embodiment, it is determined by referring to the variation suggestion display determination table (at the time of big hit) rather than the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the variation suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss). The variation suggestion display modes that can be selected are configured to be more types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is selected when determining with reference to the variation suggestion display determination table (at the time of big hit) It may be configured such that the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the variation suggestion display determination table (at the time of losing) are larger than the types of the change suggestion display modes to be obtained (the number of types May be the same). In addition, the variation suggestion display mode is drawn by a random number dedicated for determining the variation suggestion display mode. It should be noted that “red” is most easily selected when referring to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of big hit), and “gray” is most easily selected when referring to the change suggestion display determination table (when lost). The probability of jackpot expectation of the pattern change related to the change suggestion display when the change suggestion display is displayed (the appearance rate of the change that becomes a big hit with respect to the total appearance rate of the change that becomes the big hit and the change that becomes the loss) "Rainbow color" is selected only at the time of big hit, and the colors other than "Rainbow color" are the ones with high expectations from "Red", "Green", "Yellow", "Blue", " The order is “gray”. Note that the variation suggestion display mode that can be displayed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type is increased or decreased or the color that can be displayed is changed. In this example, the display color of the change suggestion display is configured so as to suggest the degree of expectation that the symbol change related to the trigger suspension is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the game state after execution of a special game may be suggested (along with the expectation which becomes a big hit). In such a configuration, especially in the probability variation gaming state, the display color of the variation suggestion display shifts to the probability variation gaming state after execution of the special game in the case of a big hit by the symbol variation being varied. (For example, if the change suggestion display mode is “red”, the probability of expected change is high, and if it is “gray”, the probability of expected change is low, etc.), it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute an effective performance that asks whether the probability variation gaming state continues or ends.

  In the present embodiment, the variation suggestion display is executed on the sub-sub-side according to the variation suggestion display mode set in the processing of the same figure, and the symbol variation is a variation related to the first main game side. In the case where the variation suggestion display mode on the first main game side is displayed and the variation suggestion display mode on the second main game side is not displayed, while the symbol variation is a variation related to the second main game side. Displays the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side, and does not display the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side. When the change suggestion display mode is “none”, the display is “white”. It should be noted that the set of commands related to the change suggestion display mode in the processing of the same figure may be executed simultaneously with the set of commands related to the hold display mode in Step 3050 and Step 3100 (the change suggestion to the set of hold display modes). A set of display modes may be included). In this embodiment, the transmission order of commands transmitted to the sub-sub control unit related to the hold display and the change suggestion display is “hold change effect on the first main game side → 1-2 on the first main game side”. On hold display mode of the first digest order → Hold display mode of the 3rd to 4th stop order on the first main game side → Hold change effect on the second main game side → 1 on the second main game side Hold display mode of hold of the second digestion order → Hold display mode of hold of the 3rd to 4th digestion order on the second main game side → Number of holds on the first main game side and the second main game side The order of the hold display based on the hold display mode → the variation pattern of the decorative symbol → the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side → the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side ”. In addition, as a configuration related to the hold display (hold display mode corresponding to unsettled hold), for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state (when the open time extension function is not activated), the hold display and the first main game side While both the two main game side hold displays are displayed on the effect display device SG, in the time reduction game state (when the open time extension function is activated), the second main game side hold display is displayed, but the first display is displayed. The hold display on the main game side may be configured not to be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2406, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2408, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Note that if the result in Step 2402 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). The process proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). To be sent).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2422, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). At step 2426, the process proceeds to step 2426. Note that if the result is No in step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and awakening stage flag (a flag that is turned on while staying in the awakening stage described later). Yes, which is turned on in step 2614), is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2428, in step 2430, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2432. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2428, the process proceeds to Step 2432. Next, in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and is a devil stage flag (a flag that is turned on while staying in the devil stage described later, step 2634). It is determined whether or not is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 2432, in step 2434, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2436. Note that if the result is No in Step 2432, the process proceeds to Step 2436.

  Next, in step 2436, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (confirmed display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). . Next, in step 2438, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2500). To do. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2410 or Step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506 and step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of the big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2512. Note that if the result in Step 2502 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpots). It may be executed as needed based on the type).

  Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit being executed and the big hit symbol being stopped ( (For example, in the case of a special game or a small hit game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, the game state after the special game is ended is sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) An effect that the person cannot recognize can be executed). Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs display appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). . Note that if the answer is No in step 2504 or step 2516, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the awakening stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the awakening stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “awakening stage” as the stay stage. Next, in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the received counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c in the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) in the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. In addition, when the process of step 2612 is executed, it is supplemented that the game state on the main side is a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state.

  Next, in step 2614, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to step 2616. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2616. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the awakening stage stay counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. Note that the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c is configured to be decremented by 1 every change (every stop of the main game symbol). If YES in step 2616, the process proceeds to step 2618. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2616, in step 2619, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is won. In the case of Yes in step 2619, in step 2620, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c to zero and proceeds to step 2618. Next, in step 2618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even in the case of No in step 2619, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2604, in step 2621, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the devil stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2621, in step 2622, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a devil stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “devil stage” as the stay stage. Next, in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 has been received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the counter value of the received limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage gaming state notification value determination table and determines the devil stage gaming state notification value by lottery. Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of a devil stage gaming state notification value determination table. As shown in the figure, the devil stage gaming state notification value is configured so that two types of values of 10 and 30 can be selected, and 30 is easier to select than 10 (the gaming state is In the case of the probability variation gaming state, a large value is easily selected). Next, in step 2632, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the determined devil stage gaming state notification value in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2634. In addition, when the process of step 2630 is executed, it is supplemented that the main game state is a probability variation game state and a non-time-reduced game state.

  Next, in step 2634, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the devil stage flag, and proceeds to step 2636. In the case of No in step 2621, the process proceeds to step 2636. Next, in step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. Note that the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 is configured to be decremented by 1 every change (every stop of the main game symbol). If Yes in step 2636, the process proceeds to step 2638. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2636, in step 2639, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is won. In the case of Yes in step 2639, in step 2640, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 to zero, and proceeds to step 2638. Next, in step 2638, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the devil stage flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even in the case of No in step 2639, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2622, in step 2641, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2641, in step 2642, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "probability change stage" (stay stage that can stay in the probability variation game state) as the stay stage, and performs the next processing (step 2999). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2641, in step 2644, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “non-probability variation stage” (stay stage that can stay in the non-probability variation gaming state) as the stay stage, and then The process proceeds to the process (step 2999).

  With the configuration as described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the hold display and the change suggestion display as the display on the effect display device SG, and the sub-subordinate related to the hold display and the change suggestion display. By managing the commands to the control unit SS in an appropriate transmission order and transmission mode, the pending display corresponding to the gaming state and the pre-reading effect being executed and the change suggestion display are displayed on the effect display device. Is possible.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since it is comprised so that a new trigger suspension may not occur when the pre-reading effect is being executed, the command related to the pre-fetching effect is configured not to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS. (The pre-reading effect is being executed even while the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is being executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the command related to the hold prefetch effect is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS when the pre-read effect is being executed, but the command received by the sub-sub control unit SS is ignored (the received The processing based on the command may not be executed). In addition, the configuration in which the command related to the hold pre-reading effect is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, or the command related to the hold pre-read effect is transmitted but ignored by the sub-sub control unit SS side is limited only during the execution of the pre-read effect. For example, when the gaming state is scheduled to shift until all symbol variations related to the existing hold are completed, or a specific hold that is not a trigger hold (hold for which reach change is executed, predetermined time) This configuration may also be applied when there is a hold with the above fluctuation time. On the sub-sub control unit SS side, when a command related to the hold change effect and the hold display mode is received, the information is held, and the command related to the hold number and the hold display (in step 3060 and step 3114). The information held at the time of receiving the command to be set) is processed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when two types of losing symbols relating to the first main game are provided and one losing symbol (in this example, “HA”) is determined in the non-time-saving gaming state. Is configured so that the variation mode may be different depending on the number of holdings at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is relatively short, and the other lost symbol (in this example, “HB”) Is determined so that the variation mode does not differ depending on the number of suspensions at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is relatively long, and the variation mode group at the time of the occurrence of the retention And the variation mode random number delimiter information are transmitted to the sub-side, so that the selection pattern of the variation mode can be made different depending on the determined loss pattern, and the variation mode group and the variation mode random number segmentation By the information, it will be able to determine whether to execute prefetching lottery, so that it is reduced data capacity.

  In the present embodiment, as a prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery (prefetch lottery at the time of winning a prize), there is a second main game hold in the hold, a time-saving game state, and there is a big hit in the hold. (Excluding newly generated hold), there is a hold that has information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold in the hold, etc., but the prohibition condition of the pre-draw lottery is not limited to this, for example, Forbidden conditions may be a probability-variable gaming state, a predetermined background effect is being executed, a main game holding number is less than or equal to a predetermined number, a predetermined reach effect is scheduled to be executed, and the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lottery timing of the look-ahead lottery is the winning timing of the game ball to the main game start port (first main game start port A10), but is not limited to this, and the main game symbol of the main game symbol Fluctuation stop timing (decoration stop timing of decoration symbol), predetermined timing in the middle of fluctuation of the main game symbol (predetermined timing in the middle of variation of the decoration symbol), variation start timing of the main game symbol (variation start timing of decoration symbol), Etc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined big hit (4A, 5A, 3B, 4B) is finished, it can be shifted to a limited frequency, and a big hit other than the predetermined big hit (3A, 7A, 9A, 5B, 7B) It is configured not to shift to a limited frequency after the end.

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading effect, one kind of effect in which the display mode of the hold changes is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various pre-reading effects and effects related to the hold may be executed. Therefore, such a configuration will be described as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the second embodiment, 1 is added to the counter value when there is a hold at the fluctuation start timing, and the counter value is reset when there is no hold at the timing when the change ends ( The expectation display scenario for displaying the expectation degree that is a big hit of the hold continuation counter SM22c, which is a counter to be cleared to zero), and the reserve allocation preparation display mode (the hold display mode related to the pre-reading effect, details will be described later) is determined. And a reserved allocation scenario determination table SM22ta, which is a table for this purpose. The counter value addition timing of the holding continuation counter SM22c is not limited to the fluctuation start timing, and 1 is added to the counter value when there is a holding at any timing in one fluctuation. In other words, the counter value only needs to be configured to be the number of times that the variable display continues while avoiding the situation in which the hold is 0 in the variable stop state.

  First, FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2003-1 (second) and step 2050 (second), that is, based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) in step 2002, the initial processing is performed. In step 2003-1 (second), the sub-main control unit SM determines whether to hold the trigger from the information relating to the hold temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (the prefetch lottery at the time of winning) Deletes the information indicating that the hold has been won) (if there is no hold in the hold that has information indicating that the trigger is on hold, this processing is not executed), and the hold display mode (the hold of the change (Including display) are all displayed in “white”, and the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is cleared to zero (the process related to the pre-reading effect is reset).

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 5B, first, in step 2050 (second), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM will be described later. The pending simultaneous change management process is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2100.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the pending simultaneous change management process according to the subroutine of Step 2050 (second) in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2052, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the hold display mode is changed to a special display mode (to be described later, simultaneous hold change). It is determined whether or not there is a hold display mode to be displayed in the production. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the devil stage flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, when the devil stage flag is on, that is, in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the limited frequency state, the simultaneous holding change effect and holding continuation counter SM22c described later are set. The counter value addition is not performed (even in the same gaming state, whether or not the simultaneous hold change effect can be executed is different). In the second embodiment, when there is a holding whose holding display mode is the special holding display mode, the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is not increased. The present invention is not limited, and it may be configured so that the counter value of the on-hold continuation counter SM22c can be increased even when there is a hold that is a special hold display mode.

  In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol change start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds 1 to the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c (increment). Note that the holding continuation counter SM22c is configured to be cleared to zero when the number of holdings on the first main game side becomes zero (when the holding is interrupted) when the main game symbol is stopped. Next, in step 2062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold continuation counter SM22c, and the counter value is the simultaneous hold change effect execution value (the counter value that will execute the simultaneous hold change effect). In this example, it is determined whether or not 25). Here, the simultaneous change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of all suspension to a special display mode (details will be described later).

  Next, in step 2066, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold display mode of all hold (display mode of the hold image display corresponding to the hold on the main game side) and the change suggestion display mode {in the relevant paragraph As will be described later, instead of displaying the hold image corresponding to the hold on the main game side, the main game side is informing that the hold is being digested (the fact that the symbol change related to the digested hold is being executed) The display mode for image display} is changed to a special display mode. Next, in step 2068, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the simultaneous hold change effect execution changing flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2070. Note that the process also proceeds to step 2070 if step 2058 or step 2062 is No. Next, in step 2070, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c on the effect display device SG (the sub-sub control unit in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). The process proceeds to step 2072. Here, in the second embodiment, when the hold is digested and the change is executed, the change suggestion is displayed on the effect display device SG in the same or similar display manner as the hold display mode related to the hold. The display mode (the change suggestion display image) is configured to be displayed.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 2052, Step 2054, or Step 2056, in Step 2078, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 issues a command to hide the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c on the effect display device SG. Set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2072. In the second embodiment, if the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is not displayed in step 2078, the counter value is not added, while if the holding number becomes 0, the counter value is not added. The counter value is configured to be reset. For example, the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the devil stage flag is off, and the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is a predetermined value. The devil stage flag is turned on when the devil stage is turned on (transition to the devil stage) from the state (for example, 15) and returned to the normal gaming state and the devil stage flag is turned off again. If the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold does not become 0 in the state, the continuation counter SM with hold Display counter value and the counter value of 2c is predetermined value is a counter value at the time of transition to the devil stage (e.g., 15) so that the return at. The devil stage is a stay stage that is shifted to after the end of the small game or after the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example). In addition, the configuration related to the display of the counter value is not limited to the devil stage, and may be applied to a stay stage transition in which the gaming state does not transition (for example, the normal gaming state before and after the stage transition). .

  Next, in step 2072, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the simultaneous hold change effect execution changing flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol variation end timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2074, in step 2076, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the simultaneous hold change effect execution changing flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the next processing. The process proceeds to (Step 2100). In addition, also when it is No at step 2072 or step 2074, it transfers to the next process (process of step 2100). Note that the hold that occurred before the change in which the counter value of the hold continued counter SM22c becomes 0 does not change the hold display mode to the special display mode before the change, and at the start of the change (step 2066). It will change to a special display mode.

  In the second embodiment, the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is added even during execution of the pre-reading effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display. In such a configuration, the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is added during execution of the pre-reading effect as in the process of this example, and there is a hold at the end of the pre-reading effect. It is desirable that the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c can be displayed again (the counter value added during the pre-reading effect is taken into account). Such a configuration is more suitable when performing a prefetch effect (so-called prefetch zone effect) that suggests the presence of a hold with a high jackpot expectation as the stay stage moves.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 of FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2126 (second) to step 2132 (second) and step 2900 (second). In other words, if the newly generated hold is a hold on the first main game side in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b in step 2126 (second). It is determined whether or not the simultaneous pending change effect execution changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2128 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold continuation counter SM22c, and the counter value is a prefetch prohibition value (21 to 25). It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 2128 (second), the flow advances to step 2150. In the second embodiment, when the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is the prefetch prohibition value (21 to 25), that is, immediately before execution of the simultaneous hold change effect, the execution of the simultaneous hold change effect and the prefetch effect. In order not to overlap with the execution of No., it is configured so that the pre-reading effect is not executed.

  If the new hold is a trigger hold in step 2112, in step 2900 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a first main game prefetch hold content determination process to be described later, 2114.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2126 (second), in step 2130 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 specially displays the hold display mode of the new hold (holding on the first main game side). The display mode (the same display mode as the on-hold display mode to be changed in the simultaneous on-hold change effect) is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 2116. Thus, in 2nd Embodiment, the hold | maintenance which occurred at the time of the fluctuation | variation which concerns on execution of a simultaneous hold change effect is comprised so that it may be displayed in a special display mode.

  In step 2200, after executing the second main game winning prefetch determination process, in step 2131 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. It is then determined whether the new hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2131 (second), after executing the second main game prefetch hold content determination process (the prefetch hold content determination process in the present embodiment is the same process content) in step 2250 The process proceeds to 2132 (second). If No, the process proceeds to step 2132 (second) without executing the process of step 2250. Next, in step 2132 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of hold other than the trigger hold as “white”, and proceeds to step 2116.

  Here, in the second embodiment, when there is a hold on the second main game side at the timing when the hold on the first main game side occurs, the process related to the look-ahead on the first main game side is reset. (The first main game prefetch execution flag is turned off, the information indicating that the trigger is on hold, the hold display mode is reset), but the reset process causes a hold on the second main game side ( Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed when there is a hold on the first main game side at the timing at which the change on the second main game side has started), that is, the look-ahead related to the first main game side During the performance, the second main game side may not be on hold (in the second embodiment, the second main game side hold is on the first main game side). Since it is digested prior to holding, the second main game side There When occurring, since the order in which the digestion of the trigger hold from being changed). Further, even when there is a hold on the second main game side, the prefetch effect relating to the first main game side may be executed, and in particular, during the execution of the prefetch effect relating to the first main game side. (For example, in the middle of executing a series of continuous effects over the digestion of the three holdings) If the second main game side has interrupted (for example, executed at the time of the first digestion of the holding (If interrupted in the middle of the continuous production), the pre-reading production in the middle of the execution is temporarily interrupted (the continuous production performed at the time of the first hold is completed, and then the second production is held. The execution of the continuous performance that is executed in this manner may be temporarily interrupted), and may be configured to resume after the interruption of the symbol change related to the hold on the second main game side that has been interrupted (for example, temporary interruption Continuous production and maintenance performed at the time of digestion of the second hold It may be configured to perform a continuous production which is scheduled to run at the time of the three eyes of digestion).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 of FIG. 37 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2750 (second), step 2800 (second), step 2850 (second), and step 2180 (second) to step 2184 (second). In other words, when there is no big hit in the hold before the new hold in step 2160, in step 2750 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution feasibility determining means SM26k determines a huge hold prefetch determination process described later. Execute. Next, in step 2800 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes skewered hold prefetch determination processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2850 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k performs a hold prefetch predetermination determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  On the other hand, if there is a second main game hold in the hold in step 2152, in step 2180 (second), the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k resets (with zero clear) the hold continued continuation counter SM22c. Next, in step 2182 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is a first main game prefetch execution flag (a huge hold prefetch execution flag, within the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b). The skewered hold prefetch execution flag and the hold prefetch execution flag) are turned off. The huge reserved prefetch execution flag is turned on in step 2766, the skewered hold prefetch execution flag is turned on in step 2818, and the reserved prefetching execution flag is turned on in step 2868. Next, in step 2184 (second), the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is information indicating that “trigger hold” from the information relating to the hold temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Is deleted, and all the hold display modes are changed to “white” (when there is no hold having information indicating that the trigger is on hold in the hold and all the hold display modes are “white”. Shifts to the next process without executing this process), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2112). In the board configuration of the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state (the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced gaming state), the game is played by left-handed (continuously firing the game ball toward the left side of the board). Since it is configured so that the second main game hold does not occur (or is difficult to occur) in step 2152, when there is a second main game hold in the hold, The counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. The process of clearing the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold in step 2180 (second) is not executed. Also good. In addition, as a board configuration different from the second embodiment, a configuration in which the second main game hold can occur even in the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened for a long time in the normal game state). In the case of a configuration having a distribution start port unit C50 and a configuration in which the first main game hold and the second main game hold can occur alternately in the normal game state, etc. A configuration in which the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is not cleared is more preferable.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a huge hold prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) in FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not all the suspended stop symbols before the new hold are “HB” symbols. To do. Here, in the second embodiment, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, all the fluctuation times related to the “HB” symbol are short fluctuation times (15 seconds or less). All suspended symbols are configured to be “HB” symbols (in the case of other symbols, there is a risk of causing a player's suspicion, such as a change in reach being executed before digestion of trigger suspension) ).

  In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a huge hold pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2762. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2754, in step 2758, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the new hold stop symbol is “HB” or “HC”. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a huge hold pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20), and proceeds to step 2762. In the case of Yes in step 2754, that is, when the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit, the huge hold look-ahead lottery is configured. However, the conditions for executing the huge hold pre-read lottery are as follows: (2) A large number of rounds to be executed (for example, 16R) may be a big hit, etc. {In that case, a huge holding pre-draw lottery is executed even in the event of a loss. If it is a big hit, it may be configured to be (1) or (2), and at the time of losing, the huge hold prefetch lottery is not executed, and when the huge hold display is made, (1) and (2 ) May be deterministic}.

  Next, in step 2762, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the executed prefetch lottery result and determines whether or not the huge hold prefetch lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k adds information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold that is won in the huge hold prefetch lottery. Next, in step 2766, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k turns on the huge hold pre-read execution flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next process {step 2800 (second ) Processing}. Even in the case of No in step 2752, step 2758, or step 2762, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2800 (second) process}.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of skewering hold prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2800 (second) in FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2802, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the huge hold prefetch execution flag is off. Here, in 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that a huge reservation prefetching effect and a skewering reservation prefetching effect may not be performed simultaneously.

  In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and all the stop symbols of the hold before the new hold are “HB” symbols. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2804, in step 2806, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a skewered hold pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2806, in step 2810, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the new hold stop symbol is “HC”. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2810, in step 2812, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a skewer hold pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20), and proceeds to step 2814.

  Next, in step 2814, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the executed prefetch lottery result and determines whether or not the skewered hold prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2814, in step 2816, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold selected in the skewered hold pre-read lottery. Next, in step 2818, the hold pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k turns on the skewer hold pre-read execution flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the next process {step 2850 (second ) Processing}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2802, step 2804, step 2810, or step 2814, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2850 (second) process}.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a pending allocation prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (second) in FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2852, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the huge hold prefetch execution flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, the huge reserved pre-reading effect and the reserved split pre-reading effect are not executed at the same time, but the skewered hold pre-reading effect and the reserved split pre-reading effect are configured to be executed simultaneously.

  In the case of Yes in Step 2852, in Step 2854, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and all the stop symbols of the hold before the new hold are “HB” symbols. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a holding pre-reading lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2864. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2856, in step 2860, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the new hold stop symbol is “HB” or “HC”. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a hold pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100), and proceeds to step 2864. In the second embodiment, in step 2860, when the new suspension stop symbol is “HB” or “HC”, the suspension prefetch lottery is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the type of the new hold stop symbol (that is, even if the new hold stop symbol is “HA”), the hold prefetch lottery may be executed.

  Next, in step 2864, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the executed prefetch lottery result and determines whether or not the hold prefetch lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2864, in step 2866, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold that is won in the hold pre-read lottery. Next, in step 2868, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k turns on the hold pre-read pre-execution flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the next process (process in step 2112). Migrate to It should be noted that even if No in Step 2852, Step 2854, Step 2860, or Step 2864, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2112).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, there are three types of pre-reading effects, and not only the pre-reading effect mode, but also the conditions of the suspended symbols that can be held on the trigger and the pre-reading effects that can be executed simultaneously are different. It is configured. Moreover, in all the pre-reading effects, the condition of the stop symbol of the hold before the trigger hold is only “HB” (the lost symbol that has a short fluctuation of 15 seconds or less). By configuring in this way, the trigger hold It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the fluctuations related to the above and to prevent the player from misunderstanding whether the hold is the trigger hold before the trigger hold. Note that the simultaneous hold change effect differs from the condition whether or not the three types of pre-read effects are triggered hold, and the hold display mode of all holds and the variable display mode change regardless of the stop pattern related to the hold. Will be.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the configuration related to the symbol type to be stopped and the look-ahead lottery winning probability is summarized. (1) The selection tendency of the lost symbol depends on the number of reservations (variation mode selection candidates differ depending on the number of reservations) (Dependence tendency to be obtained) or a tendency to be independent of the number of reservations (dependence tendency that variation mode selection candidates are not different depending on the number of reservations). (2) In the case of “HB”, the selection tendency is a pending number-dependent tendency, and in the case of “HC”, the selection tendency is a pending number-independent tendency. (3) When the symbol scheduled to stop due to a change related to a certain hold is “HC”, the certain hold will be selected in the pre-read lottery, compared to the case where the symbol scheduled to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is “HB”. The probability of winning is high (the probability that the display mode of the reserved image changes is high). (4) When a symbol that is scheduled to stop due to a change related to a certain hold is a jackpot symbol, the hold that is scheduled to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is won in the pre-read lottery. The probability that the display mode of the reserved image changes is high. The winning rate of the prefetch lottery may be a relative winning rate considering all the prefetch lotteries such as the huge hold prefetch lottery, skewered hold prefetch lottery, hold split prefetch lottery, etc. It is good also as one kind of prefetch lottery. In addition, as a configuration of the second embodiment, when a symbol scheduled to stop due to a change related to a certain hold is a jackpot symbol, a look ahead is compared to a case where the symbol scheduled to be stopped due to a variation related to a certain hold is “HC”. You may comprise so that the selection probability which makes a lottery win and sets the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the said certain hold as a display mode which becomes jackpot decision (or high hit expectation degree) is high.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the first main game prefetch hold content determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2900 (second) of FIG. 37 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2902, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and refers to whether or not the huge hold prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode of the trigger hold as the huge preparation hold display mode, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2906, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the skewering hold prefetch execution flag is on. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2906, in step 2908, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the hold allocation prefetch execution flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2908, in step 2910, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode of the trigger hold as the normal display mode (in this example, white), and the next process (the process of step 2114) ).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2906 or step 2908, in other words, if the hold allocation prefetch execution flag is on, in step 2912, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the trigger hold as the hold allocation preparation. The display mode is determined. Next, in step 2914, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold split scenario determination table SM22ta, and displays the expected split display display scenario expectation display scenario (the hold split display displayed in the hold split preparation display form. The numerical scenario representing the degree of expectation that changes to the display mode is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of a reserved allocation scenario determination table according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, when it is determined that the hold display mode becomes the reserve allocation ready display mode, until the winning of the hold that becomes the trigger hold, and the fluctuation related to the trigger hold after the winning time The degree of expectation that the change suggestion display mode becomes the reserved allocation display mode is displayed for each change. The larger the initial value (expected degree displayed when winning a trigger hold), the higher the expectation that the trigger hold will be a big hit, and the number of holds at the time of winning the hold held as a trigger hold will increase. The larger the number, the easier it is to select a smaller number of initial values. It should be noted that the expectation display scenarios of the respective reserved allocation preparation display modes are configured to be selected equally. In addition, when the stop symbol for which the trigger hold is determined is other than “HB”, the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold becomes the hold allocation display mode at the time of the change related to the trigger hold, When the determined stop symbol is “HB”, the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold is a hold allocation preparation display mode (details will be described later). Note that the content of the expectation level display scenario may be changed, and there is no problem if the type of the number (the display indicating the degree of expectation in which the change suggestion display mode becomes the hold allocation display mode) is also changed, but the number is the trigger hold It is desirable to configure so that it does not decrease as it approaches the fluctuation related to (to give the player a sense of expectation that the number will increase).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2300 in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2320 (second) to step 2330 (second) and step 2950 (second). That is, after the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined in step 2306, in step 2320 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the change It is determined whether or not the suggestion display mode (the display object when displaying the display mode that is the same as or similar to the digested hold display mode related to the variation and the display mode in the variation) is a special display mode. . In the case of Yes in step 2320 (second), in step 2322 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the special hold variation effect content determination table based on the information about the stop symbol of the main game time pattern. , The special change suggestion display mode (the change suggestion display mode in the change related to the hold of the special display mode, details will be described later) and the special notice effect content (the notice effect executed at the time of the change related to the special hold display form) And the process proceeds to step 2308.

  Here, the lower left part of the figure is an example of a special reservation variation effect content determination table according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, the special change suggestion display mode and the special notice effect content (notice effect executed at the time of change related to the special hold display mode) are different depending on the stop symbol. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that the content (type) of notice effect may differ based on the special said change suggestion display mode selected. In the second embodiment, the change related to the suspension of the special display mode is configured such that the notice effect varies depending on the stop symbol of the main game symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the result, the notice effect may be different, or the notice effect may be different depending on other factors such as the variation time.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2320 (second), in step 2324 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c, and the counter value is a simultaneous change value. (In this example, it is 21 to 25 and is in the same range as the prefetch prohibition value). In the case of Yes in step 2324 (second), in step 2326 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and executes any first primary game prefetching. It is determined whether or not the flags (the huge hold prefetch execution flag, the skewer hold prefetch execution flag, and the hold allocation prefetch execution flag) are on. In the case of Yes in step 2326 (second), in step 2950 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes pre-reading effect content determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2308.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2324 (second), in step 2328 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines execution of the simultaneous hold change effect, and proceeds to step 2330 (second). . Note that if the answer is No in step 2326 (second), the process proceeds to step 2330 (second).

  Here, the lower right part of the figure is an example of a simultaneous holding change effect according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the simultaneous hold change effect is performed, the hold display image, the change suggestion display image, the simultaneous change change effect, and the hold are continued on the effect display device SG. The counter value and the fluctuating decorative symbol are displayed, and the simultaneous pending change effect is displayed so as not to overlap with other notice effects. The effect is an effect that informs the player that the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold is a value close to the simultaneous hold change effect execution value (25 in this example). In consideration of the counter value of the current continuation continuation counter SM22c and the number of suspends on the first main game side, the counter value does not easily reach the simultaneous suspend change effect execution value (25 in this example). If it becomes deterministic (determined if the second main game hold does not occur and does not become a big hit before the arrival), it may be configured to notify the player that it is substantially definite. . Although details will be described later, in this example, the hold display and / or the change suggestion display displayed in the vicinity of the hold display and / or the change suggestion display in the display area SG10 or in the hold display. A related effect display is referred to as hold attendant information, and in the same figure, a display related to simultaneous hold change change effect is hold attendant information.

  Next, in step 2330 (second), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines the notice effect content based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game time, and proceeds to step 2308.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prefetch effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2950 (second) in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2952, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the huge pending prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2954, in step 2955, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the huge reservation prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2956, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the change is “HB”. In the case of Yes in step 2956, in step 2958, the drawing display content determination means SM21n displays the change suggestion display mode in the huge hold display mode at the start of the change, and relates to the stop symbol and the change mode of the main game symbol. Based on the information, the content of the notice effect is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2964.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2956, in step 2960, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the notice effect content based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2964. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2954, in step 2962, the drawing display content determination means SM21n makes a notice effect as a huge hold-off effect (expectation until a change related to hold that is a huge preparation hold display mode for the player The process proceeds to step 2964. Note that if the answer is No in step 2952, the process proceeds to step 2964.

  Next, in step 2964, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the skewering hold prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2964, in step 2966, the drawing display content determination unit SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2966, in step 2967, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the skewering pre-reading execution flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2968, the drawing display content determination means SM21n changes the change suggestion display mode to the skewered hold display mode in the middle of the change (for example, the timing 10 seconds after the start of change), and the main game symbol. Based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode, the content of the notice effect is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 2972.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2966, in step 2970, the drawing display content determination means SM21n displays the notice effect on hold change effect (the hold and / or hold prefetching which is a skewered preparation hold display mode for the player) The production is determined to have a sense of expectation until the change related to the hold that is won in the lottery. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2964, the process proceeds to Step 2972.

  Next, at step 2972, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the pending allocation prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2972, in step 2974, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2974, in step 2975, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the pending prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2976, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the change is “HB”. In the case of Yes in step 2976, in step 2978, the drawing display content determination means SM21n displays the change suggestion display mode in the reserved split display mode at the start of the change, and relates to the stop symbol and the change mode of the main game symbol. Based on the information, the content of the notice effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2976, in step 2980, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines the notice effect content based on the information about the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game symbol, and performs the next processing (step 2308). Process). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2974, in step 2982, the drawing display content determination means SM21n changes the notice effect to the hold change effect (expectation until the change related to the hold which is the hold split preparation display mode for the player). The effect is determined) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In the case of No in step 2972, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In the second embodiment, the skewered pre-reading effect and the pre-scheduled pre-reading effect are configured to be executed at the same time, so that the process in step 2968 and the process in step 2978 can be executed simultaneously. . In the processing of step 2958, step 2960, step 2968, step 2978, and step 2980, the change suggestion display content related to the trigger suspension is determined.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process according to the subroutine of Step 3150 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3156 (second) and step 3162 (second), that is, in step 3154, when the symbol variation is variation relating to the first main game side, step 3156 ( In the second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a change suggestion scenario determination table (a table for determining a change scenario of the change suggestion display mode during execution of the pre-reading effect, details will be described later. The change suggestion display scenario on the first main game side is determined and set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS).

  In step 3160, after the change suggestion display mode relating to the first main game side is determined as “none” and set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), step 3162 (second) Therefore, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 uses the change suggestion scenario determination table (a table for determining a change scenario of the change suggestion display mode during the pre-reading effect execution, which will be described in detail later). The change suggestion display scenario on the second main game side is determined and set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2308).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the change suggestion scenario determination table (at the time of a big hit) and the change suggestion scenario determination table (at the time of a loss). In the present embodiment, the variation suggestion display scenario related to the trigger hold, which is a scenario in which the variation suggestion display mode during execution of the pre-reading effect changes, is determined with reference to the variation suggestion scenario determination table. Yes. The types of change suggestion display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the change suggestion scenario determination table (common to both big hits and loses) are “rainbow”, “red”, and “blue”. And three display timings (display mode change timing) of “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” can exist in one symbol variation. In the second embodiment, “timing 1” is a symbol variation start timing, and the variation suggestion display mode displayed at “timing 1” is “timing 2” (for example, during symbol variation, It is configured to be able to change at two timings of “timing 3 after temporary stop in continuous variation” and “timing 3” (for example, during normal reach and super reach). It should be noted that “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” are sequentially from the timing close to the variation start timing in the symbol variation. In the second embodiment, “timing 1” is a display mode other than “white”. However, the display mode is not limited to this, and at the symbol variation start timing, the variation suggestion display mode is set as an initial display mode. It may be configured so that the change suggestion display mode can change at a plurality of timings during the change (for example, as the change time elapses from the change start timing, “white” → “ It changes from “blue” to “red”). In addition, the timing at which the variation suggestion display mode may change may be increased or decreased. For example, at each timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol in the pseudo continuous variation (temporary stop symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is executed) temporarily The display mode may be configured to change at the same time, the display mode may be configured to change during the symbol variation in the pseudo continuous variation, or the timing at which the normal reach effect is executed is “timing 3-1”. “The timing at which the first half of the super reach is started is“ timing 3-2 ”, and the timing at which the second half of the super reach is started is“ timing 3-3 ”. . Moreover, when the said change suggestion display mode changes, you may comprise with a change effect (effect for changing the said change suggestion display mode), and in that case, a change effect is produced. Even if it occurs, there may be a case where the change suggestion display mode does not change, or there may be a case where the change effect does not occur at the timing when the change effect can occur. Further, as a type of change effect to be generated, a change effect may be provided so that the change suggestion display mode is definite when it occurs. Moreover, the change suggestion display mode that changes may be configured to rank up (for example, change from “blue” to “red” but not from “red” to “blue”). It is also possible to configure so that the big hit expectation is higher as the change timing is slower (for example, the big hit expectation is higher at “timing 3” than at “timing 2”). In the second embodiment, the change suggestion display is executed on the sub-sub-side in accordance with the change suggestion display scenario set in the processing of the figure, and the symbol change is a change related to the first main game side. In some cases, the variation suggestion display mode on the first main game side is displayed and the variation suggestion display mode on the second main game side is not displayed, while the symbol variation is a variation related to the second main game side. In this case, the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side is displayed, and the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side is not displayed. When the change suggestion display mode is “none”, the display is “white”. In the second embodiment, the change suggestion display can be displayed regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (1) In the case of the probability change game state and the time reduction game state. May not be displayed. (2) In the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, it may be configured such that it is less likely to be displayed (the probability of being displayed is lower) than in other gaming states. Further, in the second embodiment, when the change of the hold display is executed, the hold display mode can be changed only once in one change of the symbol. On the other hand, when the change suggestion display is changed, the change of the single display is changed. 3 (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3) is configured so that the variation suggestion display mode can be changed, and the variation suggestion display can change more in one symbol variation than the hold display. It has become. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when executing the change of the hold display and the change suggestion display, it may be configured to change with some action (notice effect etc.).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 2442 (second) and Step 2444 (second). That is, after the main game symbol is stopped in step 2426, in step 2442 (second), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing hold counter on the first main game side, and the counter value is 0. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2442 (second), in step 2444 (second), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets the holding continuation counter SM22c (zero clear), and proceeds to step 2428. On the other hand, if No in step 2442 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 47 is a simultaneous hold change effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. First, in a situation where the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold is 22, the simultaneous hold change effect is executed due to the counter value being 22. After that, after the main game symbol is stopped three times, the next fluctuation starts, the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c becomes 25, the display of the counter value is not displayed, and the simultaneous holding change effect is executed. The hold display mode and the variation suggestion display mode are changed to a special display mode (egg display mode).

  After all the hold display modes and the change suggestion display modes are changed to the special display mode, the change stop pattern is “HA”, “3A”, “4A”, “5A”, “1K” or “2K”. In this case, “person” is displayed as the special change suggestion display mode at the change start timing (immediately after the simultaneous hold change effect is executed). Thereafter, due to the fact that the special variation suggestion display mode is “person”, the variation time suggestion effect (the effect suggesting the length of the variation time of the variation) is executed with the same variation. Further, when the special change suggestion display mode is “person”, it may be configured to suggest a production mode (reach type or the like) in addition to the length of the change time.

  On the other hand, after all the hold display modes and the change suggestion display modes are changed to the special display mode, when the change stop pattern is “HB”, the change start timing (immediately after the simultaneous hold change effect is executed) As a special change suggestion display mode, “star” is displayed. After that, a game explanation explanation effect (an effect explaining the characteristic part of the game machine's game characteristic) is executed due to the fact that the special change suggestion display mode is “star” with the same change. When the special variation suggestion display mode is “star”, a game explanation explanation is basically executed, but a change related to the execution of the effect is a big hit. In some cases, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, such as “Gekiatsu” (may be executed in a part of the variation that causes a loss).

  On the other hand, after all the hold display modes and the change suggestion display modes are changed to the special display mode, if the change stop pattern is “HC”, “7A” or “9A”, the change start timing (simultaneous hold) “Chick” is displayed as the special change suggestion display mode immediately after the change effect is executed. After that, due to the fact that the special variation suggestion display mode is “chick” with the same variation, the success / failure suggestion effect (effect that suggests the success / failure result of the variation) is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the content (type) of the notice effect in the certain variation differs depending on the type of the special variation suggestion display mode (or the stop symbol of the main game symbol) in the certain variation. It is configured to In addition, you may comprise so that the notice effect concerning the holding | maintenance of the said special display aspect may be performed by a player's operation (for example, pressing of sub input button SB). Also, when the special change suggestion display mode is “star”, a notice effect is executed by the player's operation, and when the special change suggestion display mode is “person” or “chick”, It may be configured to be executed without the user's operation.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the second embodiment gives a player a privilege not related to a game medium (non-game medium privilege) and a service that creates a new interest using the non-game medium privilege (game machine linkage) A system for providing a service to a player may be provided. Examples of the service include a content stage distribution service, a gaming machine presentation custom service, and the like. The content stage distribution service is based on a game result on a gaming machine, and from a web site to a mobile communication terminal. Is a service that distributes specific image data, audio data, etc. in stages, and the gaming machine production custom service is generated on the gaming machine based on the personal data of the player registered on the website This is a service that allows a player to arbitrarily change image data and audio data used in various effects. In addition, the service may be applied to the simultaneous hold change effect. For example, the type of the special change suggestion display mode related to the hold changed by the simultaneous hold change effect or the change related to the hold that has become the special display mode. The type of the result of the effect is stored, and the service is given according to the type of the special change suggestion display mode executed and / or the result of the effect (the number of types, whether or not an effect that is difficult to execute is generated). You may comprise so that it may obtain. Also, a point associated with the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c (for example, when the counter value immediately before being reset is 10 or more, the counter value becomes a point) is added to the player. The service may be given by the points. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the counter value of the holding continuation counter SM22c is not reset even when it reaches a predetermined value (25 in this example).

  In addition, the granted service is executed during a stand-by demonstration (when a game ball has not been entered into the prize opening for a predetermined time, or when it is determined that the game has not progressed for a predetermined time, etc.) For example, as the service, the player can select the background effect in the standby effect (or the type of background effect that can be selected changes). Also good.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a prefetch effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. First, an example of a huge reserved pre-reading effect will be described. First, the decorative design fluctuates under the situation where the counter value of the on-hold continuation counter SM22c is 10. Thereafter, during the same change, a new hold is generated, the new hold is won in the huge hold look-ahead lottery, and the selected hold is displayed in the huge ready hold display mode. Thereafter, the next change is started, and a huge hold-over effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. Thereafter, the main game symbol is stopped three times, the next variation is started, and the huge hold display mode is displayed as the variation suggestion display mode. In addition, in this example, when the huge reservation look-ahead lottery is won, the huge hold display mode is always displayed as the change suggestion display mode. A pattern (gase pattern) in which the huge hold display mode is not displayed at the start of the fluctuation may be provided, and in such a case, whether or not the huge hold display mode is displayed in the huge hold ringing effect. An effect that suggests the degree of expectation may be executed (for example, a number is added for each change, and when the value reaches 100, it is definite that the huge hold display mode is displayed, etc. ).

  Next, the skewered hold pre-reading effect will be illustrated. First, the decorative design fluctuates under the situation where the counter value of the on-hold continuation counter SM22c is 10. Thereafter, during the same change, a new hold occurs, and the new hold is skewered and wins the hold pre-read lottery (the hold display mode is “white”). Thereafter, the next change is started, and the hold change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. Thereafter, at the timing 10 seconds after the main game symbol is stopped three times and the next change is started, the change suggestion display mode changes from the normal display mode (white display mode) to the skewered hold display mode. In this example, when the skewered hold pre-read lottery is won, the skewered hold display mode is always displayed as the change suggestion display mode. A pattern that does not change to the skewered hold display mode (a white pattern that does not change, so-called gusset pattern) may be provided in the middle, and in such a case, the skewered hold display is performed with the skewered hold effect. You may perform the production | presentation which suggests the expectation degree of whether it changes into a mode. In addition, change the hold display mode in the change before the change related to the trigger hold (there are several types of hold display modes that can be changed, and the jackpot expectation increases every time the change is made). You may comprise so that a jackpot expectation degree may be suggested by a fluctuation suggestion display mode. Moreover, you may comprise so that a holding | maintenance display mode can turn into a skewering holding display mode in the middle of the fluctuation | variation before the fluctuation | variation which concerns on trigger hold | maintenance. In such a configuration, a pattern in which lightning strikes on hold and becomes skewered hold display mode, and a pattern in which lightning does not stick on hold and does not enter skewered hold display mode (the hold display mode does not change) (so-called gusset pattern) ) May be provided.

  Next, an example of a reserved prefetching effect will be described. Note that in the second embodiment, the execution mode of the change hold turn effect is the same effect content as the skewered hold prefetch effect, and the details are omitted. In addition, you may comprise so that the change hold turn production | presentation effect concerning a reservation split pre-reading effect and the change hold turn production effect concerning a skewered hold pre-reading production may differ. In the reserved split pre-reading effect, the main game symbol stops three times after execution of the reserved change rolling effect, the next variation is started, and the reserved split display mode is displayed as the variation suggestion display mode. It should be noted that a pattern (gase pattern) that does not change to the reserved split display mode in the middle of the change related to the trigger hold may be provided in the reserved split prefetch effect as well as the huge reserved prefetch effect.

  Next, an example will be described in which the reserved split pre-reading effect and the skewered pre-reading effect are executed simultaneously. Note that until the execution of the change hold-over effect, the content is the same as the skewered hold pre-read effect, and the details are omitted. In addition, “50”, which is the expected degree that the reserved allocation display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode, is displayed in the reserved allocation preparation display mode (the display of “100” indicates that the change is deterministic. Become). After execution of the hold-change change effect, the main game symbol is stopped three times, the next change is started, and the hold split display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode. Thereafter, in the middle of the fluctuation of the same fluctuation (timing 10 seconds after the fluctuation starts), the change suggestion display mode is changed to the hold split display mode and the hold display mode is overlapped. In the pre-reading effect, the hold display mode may be a skewed hold display mode in the middle of the change before the change related to the trigger hold, or the above-described gash pattern may be provided. In addition, when the reserved prefetching effect and the skewered prefetching effect are executed in duplicate, the lightning stabs in the hold relatively compared to the case where the reserved prefetching effect is executed alone without duplication. It is also possible to configure such that the ratio of the pattern that becomes the skewered hold display mode is increased (the frequency of the gaze pattern is decreased).

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute the simultaneous hold change effect when the number of hold times does not become 0 for the predetermined number of fluctuation times (25 times in this example). In addition to the configuration, by providing a plurality of pre-reading effects with different execution conditions, effect modes, and hold change timings, the player can make various effects related to hold and special effects executed every predetermined number of fluctuations. Will be able to proceed with the game without getting bored.

  In the second embodiment, the display timing of the huge preparation hold display mode and the reserve split preparation display mode is configured to be the hold occurrence timing (winning timing), but is not limited thereto, and the timing is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display at the timing (for example, the next variation start, the next variation middle, the next variation start, the next variation middle timing, etc.) before and after the change concerning trigger hold.

  In the second embodiment, the huge hold display mode and the hold split display mode can be displayed only as the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the trigger is triggered from the timing onward. It may be configured such that it can be displayed as the hold display mode (the hold display mode can be changed) at the change start timing (for example, the next change start, the next change start timing, etc.) before the change start related to the hold.

  In the second embodiment, the holding continuation counter SM22c is an addition counter, but is not limited thereto, and may be a subtraction counter. In addition, the simultaneous holding change effect is configured to be executed by continuing the state where the number of holds is not 0 for a predetermined number of times of fluctuation (in this example, 25 times), but is not limited to this, regardless of the number of holds. It may be configured so that it can be executed every predetermined number of fluctuations (even if the number of holdings becomes 0 on the way).

  In the second embodiment, at the time of executing the simultaneous hold change effect, the hold display mode is changed to one type of special display mode, and then a plurality of types of special relevant change suggestion display modes can be displayed. In addition, it may be configured to change to a plurality of special display modes at the time of execution of the simultaneous hold change effect.

  In the second embodiment, a look-ahead lottery is executed according to the type of symbol that is scheduled to be suspended (whether it is a big hit symbol, a lost symbol “HB”, or a lost symbol “HC”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a determination may be made based on a new hold variation time (for example, whether the variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time). The determination may be made based on random number delimiter information (for example, whether or not the variation mode random number delimiter information is delimiter 3). When the determination is made based on the variation mode random number delimiter information, the variation mode group (in which the stop symbol is “HA”, “HB”, or “HC” can be determined by the variation mode random number delimiter information ( Alternatively, it may be configured to be variable mode random number separator information).

  Also, in this example, the variation time is determined by dividing into two blocks, the A block that is the period before the reach variation and the B block that is the period after the reach variation. A variation may be formed by adding a variation addition time and / or a variation fixed time.

  Further, in this example, the variable fixed time is set to a long time (the same time as the variable time to reach, for example, 30 seconds), and the reach effect can be executed during the variable fixed time. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the reach effect is executed in the change time and the pseudo reach effect is executed in the change time, where the change time is less than the change fixed time. For example, the variation fixed time is set to 90 seconds, the variation time is set to 60 seconds, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the variation time is set to “123” which is a special stop combination (the above-mentioned chance chance) (“4 × 4”). The left column and the right column may be the same stop symbol, and the middle column stop symbol may be a special symbol.) After that, in order to determine whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a loss After that, the effect that the decoration symbol stop symbol becomes “444” is executed.

  Moreover, in this example, it may be configured such that the shorter the fixed number of suspensions, the easier it is to select the short fixed time as the variable fixed time.

  In addition, in this example, when the hold is generated, the result of the hold, the stop symbol, the change mode group, and the change mode random number delimiter information can be transmitted to the sub side. Even when the game state is different between the time and the digestion of the hold that has occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not the result or the variation mode group is the same (whether or not different). Therefore, even if the game result is different between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the generated hold when the result of the determination and the variation mode group are the same, even if the prefetch effect is executed across the game state Alternatively, depending on the type of the prefetching effect to be executed, there may be a case where the prefetching effect is executed across the gaming state and a case where it is not executed.

  Further, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and a pre-reading effect that can be executed depending on the trigger suspension variation mode and a prefetch effect that can be executed regardless of the trigger suspension variation mode may be provided. In addition, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be generated at the same time, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be started at the same time when the pre-reading effects are started, and another pre-reading effect is started during the execution of one pre-reading effect. You may comprise. In addition, the timing of the pre-reading effect rank-up (for example, the expectation level of the big hit is increased, for example, when the hold display color is changed from “blue to red”) may be executed at the same time. It may be configured to up. A plurality of types of prefetching effects may be provided, for example, prefetching effects in which the on-hold display mode changes, chances of prefetching effects that suggest a big hit expectation degree in the stop appearance of decorative symbols (combination of stop symbols), background A change look-ahead effect, a countdown notice look-ahead effect, etc. may be provided. In addition, the plurality of pre-reading effects are the types or combinations of pre-reading effects that can occur at the same time, the rank-up degree when any of them occurs (1 step UP, 2 steps UP, not UP), and the display mode that appears first. The jackpot expectation, etc. may be configured to be different depending on the symbols scheduled to be stopped related to the hold that triggered the prefetch lottery. For example, when performing the prefetch effect related to “HC”, the prefetch related to “HB” There may be more types or combinations of pre-reading effects that can occur at the same time than when the effects are performed, the degree of rank increase is high when any of them occurs, and a display mode with a high expectation level is likely to appear first, etc. .

  In this example, the pre-read lottery is not executed when there is a trigger hold in the hold. However, the condition for not executing the pre-read lot is not limited to this. It may be configured not to execute the prefetch lottery when there is a hold that becomes a change (a change of the main game symbol that will execute the reach effect).

  As a configuration of the gaming machine according to the present example, the main game symbol is changed once, after “temporary stop display of left / middle / right symbols → re-change (so-called pseudo change)” is repeated a plurality of times. By stopping the game symbol, it is possible to perform pseudo continuous variation, which is an effect technique that shows the player that the main game symbol fluctuates multiple times during one variation of the main game symbol. May be. In addition, in such a configuration, during execution of the pre-reading effect, as a changing effect related to the hold that is digested before the trigger hold, the pseudo continuous change is not executed, and the changing effect related to the trigger hold is You may comprise so that a pseudo | simulation continuous variation can be performed.

  In the second embodiment, the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side changes (displayed in a display other than “white” which is a normal display mode) at a plurality of timings (at the start of change, start of change). 10 seconds after that), but the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side changes (displayed in a display other than “white” which is the normal display mode) is one type of timing (at the start of the change) It has become only. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation suggestion display mode on the second main game side may be configured to change during the symbol variation, but in such a configuration, the first main game is configured. Side and the second main game side (first type first type multi-function machine), the hold on the second main game side is digested in preference to the hold on the first main game side, the first main game side The game machine is constructed so that it is advantageous for the player to advance the game on the second main game side rather than proceeding on the game side, and when the open time extension function is not activated (in the non-time reduction game state) ), The change on the second main game side when the open time extension function is activated (in the time-reduced game state) rather than the type of timing at which the change indication display mode on the first main game side can change during the pattern change There are fewer types of timings that suggest indications can change in the middle of symbol changes Be configured is desirable.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the configuration that can appropriately execute the command set to the sub-sub control unit SS according to the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode is illustrated, but the specification of the specification different from the second embodiment In the gaming machine, the command content and the command transmission mode to the sub-sub control unit according to the hold display mode different from the second embodiment and the change suggestion display mode and the command transmission mode, the command content more suitable for the specifications of the gaming machine and A command transmission mode can be adopted. Accordingly, such a configuration will be described as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment has a variable fixed time timer MP12t for measuring the variable fixed time of the main game symbol.

  First, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1412 (second modification 1), step 1450 (second modification 1), step 1850 (second modification 1), and step 1439 (second modification 1) to step 1443 (second modification). In step 1410, after the stop symbol for the main game symbol is determined, in step 1412 (second variable 1), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 sets the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. With reference to this, it is determined whether or not the limited frequency flag (in the first modification from the second embodiment, there is only one type of limited frequency state, which is the limited frequency flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412 (second variation 1), in step 1450 (second variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and step 1650 (second variation). Shift to 1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1412 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1416 to determine the variation mode relating to the main game symbol, and then proceeds to step 1850 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1850 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes variable fixed time determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1418.

  After turning off the changing flag in step 1434, in step 1439 (second change 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C uses the determined change fixed time as the change fixed time timer. Set to MP12t (decrement timer) and start the timer. Next, in step 1440 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C changes within the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The fixing flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1442 (second variation 1).

  If the changing flag is OFF in step 1426, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C temporarily stores the first / second main game symbol information in step 1441 (second variable 1). With reference to the flag area of the means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the variable fixing flag is on. If Yes in step 1441 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1442 (second modification 1). If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1442 (second variable 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the variable fixed time timer MP12t and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. . In the case of Yes in step 1442 (second variation 1), in step 1443 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means. The variable fixed flag in the flag area of MB11b-C is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1436. In the first modification from the second embodiment, since no small hit is provided and a variable fixed time is provided, the change start condition in step 1403 is not a special game, and the main game symbol The condition is that the game is not changing, the main game symbol is on hold, and the change is not fixed.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1464, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value is set to mode A {in the first modified example from the second embodiment, the stay mode ( It is determined whether or not it is within a range that is defined so that the limited frequency table to be referred to is different when the stay mode is different). In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table 1), and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, The variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1472. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1464, in step 1470, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table 2), and uses the main game side random number and the result lottery result. Based on this, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1472. Details of the limited frequency table will be described later.

  Next, at step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c (decrement). Next, at step 1474, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and performs the next process {step 1850 (second variable 1)}. Even in the case of No in step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1850 (second modification 1)}.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a limited frequency stay mode determination table. As shown in the figure, in the first modification from the second embodiment, “mode A” and “mode B” exist as limited frequency stay modes, and the stay mode (limited frequency stay mode). When “mode A” is selected, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, and when the stay mode is “mode B”, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2. It is configured. The stay mode is configured to be determined by the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and when the special game ends and shifts to the limited frequency state, the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed 20 times. Each mode is configured as “mode A” → “mode A” → “mode B” → “mode A” {if “mode A” → “mode A”, the stay mode is the same However, as will be described later, the stay stage can be different, that is, the variation mode determination table (limited frequency table) referred to when determining the variation mode managed on the main control board M side is Although it is the same, it is comprised so that the stay stage managed on the sub control board | substrate S side may differ). It should be noted that the contents of the limited frequency stay mode determination table can be changed, the number of types of stay modes may be three or more, and the range of the limited frequency counter value, the transition mode of the stay mode, and the like are also changed. There is no problem.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second modified 1) in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in Step 1852, in Step 1854, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first / second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the symbol fluctuation is limited. It is determined whether or not the symbol variation is determined by referring to the frequency table. In the case of Yes in step 1854, that is, in the case where the symbol variation is the final variation referring to the limited frequency table (in this example, the final variation in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), in step 1856 the first variation The second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines the fixed time of variation of the symbol variation to be a long time (which may be a relatively long time, in this example, 15 seconds), and performs the next processing (step 1418). On the other hand, if No in Step 1852 or No in Step 1854, then in Step 1858, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variation variation time of the symbol variation to a short time (relatively short). The time is sufficient, and in this example, it is determined to be 0.2 seconds), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1418). As described above, the variation fixed time of the main game symbol according to the first modification from the second embodiment is the final variation referring to the limited frequency table (in this example, the final variation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state). Is configured to have a relatively long time.

  Next, FIG. 52 is an example of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is that no small hit is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the gaming machine having the structure of the pre-reading effect shown in the first modification from the second embodiment, a small hit is provided as in the present embodiment to the second embodiment. You may have, and it may have two or more lose symbols.

  Next, FIG. 53 is an example of a limited frequency table in the first modification from the second embodiment. In the first modification from the second embodiment, the gaming state when referring to the limited frequency table is a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and mainly in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. It is configured to advance the game by changing the second main game symbol. With such a configuration, the first main game side changes at the time of referring to the limited frequency table because it is a change that is not normally executed or is difficult to be performed (because it is an irregular change). At the time of losing, the fluctuation time is relatively longer than that at the time of losing on the second main game side, and the time for causing the hold on the second main game side is secured. On the second main game side, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is a reach fluctuation, and in the limited frequency table 1, the reach fluctuation can be executed at both the big hit and the lost time, while the limited frequency In Table 2, the reach variation is executed only at the time of big hit, and the reach variation is not executed at the time of loss, so that when the reach variation occurs when referring to the limited frequency table 2, it becomes definite that the symbol change becomes a big hit ( However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the symbol variation is higher than 50%, that is, the probability that the symbol variation when reaching the reach variation when the limitation frequency table 1 is referred to is higher than the probability that the symbol variation is a big hit). When the reach fluctuation occurs when referring to the limited frequency table 1, the ratio that the symbol fluctuation is a big hit is about 50%. By configuring in this way, in the second modification from the second embodiment configured to transition between a situation in which the limited frequency table 1 is referenced and a situation in which the limited frequency table 2 is referenced in the probability variation gaming state. In the case of reach fluctuation, it is configured to be able to enjoy the game with two game characteristics: a situation where the big hit is deterministic and a situation where the reach fluctuation can be expected at 50%. .

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1554 (second modification 1) to step 1560 (second modification 1), and the purpose thereof is as a probability variation end condition in modification example 1 from the second embodiment. It is to add a change end of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times after the special game ends. That is, in step 1554 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1554 (second variation 1), in step 1556 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the count value of the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1558 (second variable 1), in step 1560 (second variable 1), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Then, the process proceeds to step 1570. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1554 (second modification 1) or step 1558 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1570.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1605 (second modification 1), step 1608 (second modification 1), step 1610 (second modification 1), and step 1615 (second modification 1). After turning on the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1605 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets the probability variation counter MP51c (clears to zero), and proceeds to step 1606. Further, after resetting the time reduction counter MP52c in step 1606 (zero clear), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero clear) the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1608 (second variation 1), and proceeds to step 1612. . Also, after turning off the condition device operation flag in step 1614, in step 1615 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 is a special game winning command (a command related to the fact that the special game has been won, Set to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side that the specific game has been completed can be transmitted to the sub-side by a command (sub-main control by the control command transmission process of step 1999) The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (second variation 1) in FIG. 20 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1783, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1784, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1786, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1784, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time-saving number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1787, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in Step 1788, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1789, the specific game control means MP50 can transmit a specific game start command (a command related to the start of the specific game, and the sub-side that the specific game has started by the command). ) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1790, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 3200 (second variation 1), that is, after executing the stay stage determination process in step 2600, the sub-control board S is changed in step 3200 (second variation 1). Then, an initialization command transmission determination process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 37 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2207 (second change 1). That is, if there is no big hit in the hold before the new hold in step 2206, step 2207 (second change 1). ), The hold pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is the last symbol variation in the specific game (limited in the first modification from the second embodiment). The final symbol variation in the frequency state is also the same variation), and it is determined whether or not the digestion is scheduled to be suspended. If yes in step 2207 (second variation 1), the pre-read lottery is executed in the processing after step 2208, while if no, it is determined that there is no target to execute the pre-read lottery, and the next process {step 2131 (second processing). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the specific game final variation, that is, the final symbol variation in the probability variation gaming state in which 80 variation stays are possible (the stay stage management counter value is 1). Is configured not to execute a pre-read lottery.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the on-hold pending content transmission process according to the subroutine of Step 3050 (second modified 1) in FIG. 37 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, at step 3062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and turns on the specific game flag (turned on at step 2654, which will be described later, on during the specific game). It is determined whether or not the flag) is off. In the case of Yes in step 3062, in step 3064, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the prefetch effect on the first main game side is being executed. judge. Here, the 1st main game side prefetch effect which concerns on the example 1 of a change from 2nd Embodiment is a huge reservation prefetch effect, a skewered hold prefetch effect, a reservation split prefetch effect, and a hold simultaneous change effect. In the case of Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode after the hold change (after the hold change effect is executed) to execute the hold change (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS). Will be done). Next, in step 3068, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the hold change (the display position of the hold display in the display area SG10, and the first to fourth digest order from the left). And the process proceeds to step 3070. Note that if the answer is No in Step 3064, the process proceeds to Step 3070.

  Next, in step 3070, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is related to the hold display related to the hold display (displayed in the vicinity of the hold display in the display area SG10 or in the hold display). It is a certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) and a command related to the effect content is set (holding split preparation display mode, hold change turning effect, Etc. are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3072, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the change suggestion display supplementary information related to the hold prefetching effect (in the vicinity of the change suggestion display in the display area SG10 or in the change suggestion display). And a display related to the variation suggestion display, for example, a number is displayed in the variation suggestion display, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the variation suggestion display, etc.) Set (hold allocation display mode, etc. is set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the display related to the hold prefetching effect is set by separate processing of the command for the effect content related to the hold display and the effect content related to the change suggestion display. It is configured to be.

  Next, in step 3074, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is associated with the hold display information related to the hold display (displayed in the vicinity of the hold display in the display region SG10 or in the hold display). It is a certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed near the hold display, etc.) and a command related to the effect content is set (a huge preparation display mode, a huge hold-in effect, a huge The hold display mode, the background effect, etc. are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3076, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the hold supplementary information related to the skew hold hold pre-reading effect (relevant to the hold display displayed in the vicinity of the hold display or in the hold display in the display area SG10). A certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) and a command related to the effect content is set (hold change change effect, skewered hold display mode, effect The execution timing and the like are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to Step 3084.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3062, in step 3078, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and whether or not the pre-read effect on the second main game side is being executed. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3078, in step 3080, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 performs a hold change (the hold display mode changes from “white” to “red” or the like as described above). A subsequent hold display mode (for example, “red”) is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3082, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a hold digest order (the position of the hold display, for example, the third digest order) for executing the hold change to the sub-sub control unit SS. The command is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 3084. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 3078, the processing moves to step 3084.

  Next, in step 3084, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and step 2250, the hold display based on the hold display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of the post-change hold display mode and the command transmission mode related to the hold display position. As shown in the figure, after the change depending on the type of the hold change effect command (command to the sub-sub side) The hold display mode is determined. Further, the command related to the pending change position (command to the sub-sub side) includes information regarding the change suggestion display, the first digestion order to the fourth digestion order. Here, in detail about the feature point of the command related to the hold change effect in the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, for the post-change hold display mode, (1) when the huge hold pre-read effect is being executed, When the commands related to the hold prefetching effect, the skewered prefetching effect, and the hold simultaneous change effect are set and transmitted, it is determined that they are out of range (because the huge prefetching effect is not executed simultaneously with other prefetching effects) (2) Since the skewering hold pre-reading effect is not executed for the hold of the fourth digestion order, it is determined that the command is set and transmitted when the command related to the fourth digestion order is set. (3) When the sub-sub control unit SS receives a command that is out of the range, the sub-sub control unit SS does not execute the process (ignores the command that is out of the range). Used (for example, changing from “white” to “red”) to initialize (or to change the display indicating the change suggestion) (change the display mode to “white”). It is configured. Here, the “out of range” described above will be described in detail. For example, during execution of a huge hold pre-reading effect, the hold change effect command is configured not to be transmitted to the sub-sub side. When a hold change command related to a hold pre-reading effect is received, it is determined that the command is out of range (ignoring the command received on the sub-sub-side or not processing even if the command is received), that is, in an irregular situation When the sub-sub-side receives the transmitted command and determines that it is out of range, the command is ignored (the process related to the command is not executed). In addition, when the sub-sub-side receives a command indicating the fourth digest order as the hold change position command when executing the skewered hold prefetching effect, the trigger hold related to the skewered hold prefetch effect changes the hold change when the trigger hold occurs. Therefore, it is determined that the command is out of range. In addition, as a specific example of the set of commands related to the contents of the pending change effect and the execution of the pending change effect, for example, when the pending change effect is a huge pending look-ahead effect and the pending change position is the second digestion order In the case where the second digestion order hold is a huge hold display mode, the hold change effect is a huge hold lookahead effect, and the hold change position is the change suggestion display, the change suggestion display is a huge ready hold display mode. It becomes. In the drawing, the hold change effect on the first main game side is extracted, and the hold display position on the second main game side is a display position different from the hold display position on the first main game side. Yes.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the digestion pending content transmission process according to the subroutine of Step 3100 (second modification 1) in FIG. 37 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. In this figure, since the processing is similar to the on-hold content transmission processing at the time of occurrence in FIG. 59, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 (second modification 1) in FIG. 57 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main side a specific game start command (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state to probability variation gaming state and It is determined whether or not information indicating that the game has been shifted to the time-saving game state has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2653, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the initial value (80) to the stay stage management counter (counter for determining the current stay stage). Next, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 is in the specific game running flag (in this example, in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn on the flag that turns on. Next, in step 2655, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “normal probability variation stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2662.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and issues a special game winning command (information indicating that the special game is won) from the main side. It is determined whether or not it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the stay stage management counter. Next, in step 2659, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 is a counter after the specific game (a counter for measuring the number of times of change of the main game symbol from the timing when the specific game is ended by the passage of the number of times of change of the main game symbol). Reset (zero clear). Next, in step 2661, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2662. Note that if the result of step 2656 is No, the process proceeds to step 2662.

  Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game running flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2663, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2663, in step 2664, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the stay stage management counter. Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2669, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined value (20) in the counter after specific game, and the process proceeds to step 2670. Note that if the answer is No in step 2663 or step 2666, the process also proceeds to step 2670.

  Next, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter, and the counter value is within the range where the break is 3 (if “40 ≧ stay stage management counter value ≧ 21”, break). 3). In the case of Yes in step 2670, in step 2671, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter, and the counter value is a delimiter switching value (a stay stage management counter value in which the stage delimiter is newly switched, In this example, it is determined whether it is “60”, “40”, “20”). If the stay stage counter value is “40”, the result of step 2670 is No, so the process of step 2671 is not executed. In the case of Yes in step 2671, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a trigger hold scheduled to be digested at the next break and scheduled to be a big hit ( For example, in the state where the stay stage management counter value is “60”, when the third digestion hold is a trigger hold that is a big hit, the stay stage of the break 2 is “special probability variation stage”. Therefore, it becomes No). In the case of Yes in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “probability change stage” as the stay stage in step 2673, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3200 (second change 1)}. Also in the case of No in step 2671, the process shifts to step 2673 to set “probability change stage” as the stay stage. In the case of No in step 2670 or step 2672, in step 2676, the background effect display control means SM23 displays “special probability variation stage (if reach variation is executed, the variation may be a big hit) as the stay stage. “Stay stage that becomes deterministic)” is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3200 (second modification 1)}. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the stay stage includes the “probability change stage” and the “special probability change stage”. In the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, In this case, the stay stage is transited as “separation 1 = probability change stage → separation 2 = accuracy change stage → separation 3 = special probability change stage → separation 4 = accuracy change stage”. In addition, in “60” or “20” in which the stay stage management counter value is the delimiter switching value, the “probability change stage” is originally set as the stay stage, but the trigger that is expected to be a big hit within the hold When there is a hold, a “special probability change stage” is set as the stay stage (there is a reach effect with a symbol change related to the trigger hold and a big hit). Although not shown, the “probability changing stage” and the “special probability changing stage” are configured to be recognized as different stages as viewed from the player (the appearance is greatly different).

  If NO in step 2662, in step 2678, background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific game end flag is on. . In the case of Step 2678 Yes, in Step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the specific post-game counter (decrement). Next, in step 2682, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the counter after specific game and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2682, in step 2684, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2686. On the other hand, if No at step 2682, the process proceeds to step 2686. Next, in step 2686, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the “Stage after probability variation end (if the probability variation gaming state is terminated due to the passage of the number of variations of the main game symbol) as the stay stage. The period until the game symbol ends fluctuating “stay in a stay stage different from the“ normal stage ”)” is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3200 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2678, in step 2688, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “normal stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3200 (second modification 1)}. .

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a stay stage determination table. Since the detailed description of this table has been described above, it will be omitted. Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of stay stages that can stay in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, and can stay in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state. There are two types of stay stages.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of initialization command transmission determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 (second modified 1) in FIG. 57 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the prefetching related information temporary storage means SM26b and determines whether or not a trigger hold related to skewering hold prefetching has newly occurred. If YES in step 3202, the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3202, in step 3203, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the big hit symbol has been newly stopped. If Yes in step 3203, the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3203, in step 3204, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new hold on the second main game side has occurred. . If Yes in step 3206, the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3208, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether there is no hold on the second main game side. Determine (if No in this process, the second main game hold is not newly generated but the second main game hold already exists). In the case of Yes in step 3208, in step 3210, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the prefetch related information temporary storage means SM26b, and determines whether or not the prefetch effect on the first main game side is not executed. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3211, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether it is a hold occurrence timing or a hold digest timing. If Yes in step 3211, the process proceeds to step 3212. In the process of step 3211, it may be determined only whether it is a hold occurrence timing or only a hold digest timing.

  Next, in step 3212, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets “no hold change” as the hold display mode on the first main game side (a command for initializing the above-described hold display mode is sub-sub-control). The command is transmitted to the section SS). Next, in step 3214, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets the number of suspensions on the first main game side (command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the next processing (step 2300). The process proceeds to (1). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300) also in the case of No in step 3204, step 3208, step 3210, or step 3211. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the skewered hold pre-reading effect is executed as the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is “white” whose hold display mode is the initial display mode at the start of pre-reading. Since it is configured to change to the skewered hold display mode in the middle of the execution of the prefetch effect, when the prefetch effect is executed, as a command related to the hold display mode on the first main game side “No hold change” is set (a command for initializing the above-described hold display mode is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, (1) Occurrence of a trigger hold related to a skewered hold pre-reading effect, which is a pre-reading effect that can be held at a timing later than the trigger hold occurrence time. Timing, (2) jackpot start timing, (3) timing when the second main game hold occurs in the non-time-reduced game state, (4) non-time-reduced game state and the second main game hold does not exist and 1 The hold display mode is initialized at the timing when the hold occurs or the hold is consumed in a situation where the pre-reading effect on the main game side is not executed (the initialization command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS) In addition, as an initialization command, a command related to a hold display mode of “no hold change” and a command related to the number of holds on the first main game side are set. Also, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when a trigger hold related to a skewered hold pre-reading effect, which is a hold pre-reading effect that does not change the hold display mode when a trigger hold occurs, is initialized. While a command is set, when a trigger hold related to a prefetch effect such as a huge hold prefetch effect that is a hold prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold when the trigger hold occurs, the initialization command is not set. (The hold display mode is all “white” at the time of trigger hold occurrence related to skewered hold pre-reading effect.) Note that the transmission condition of the initialization command is not limited to this, for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, 2R, and a jackpot symbol related to a jackpot that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends) It may be configured not to send an initialization command when stopping (for example, an initialization command is sent when a big hit symbol of 4R or more, or a big hit symbol related to a big hit that can substantially acquire a game ball is stopped). If a hit is provided, an initialization command may not be transmitted when the small hit symbol is stopped, and in such a case, (1) non-time is set as a condition for not transmitting the initialization command. Applies only when the game is in a specific gaming state, such as when the big hit symbol is stopped for a big hit without a play in the shortened gaming state, or when the small hit symbol is stopped in the non-time shortened gaming state. (2) The above initialization command The initialization command is transmitted even when the condition for not transmitting is satisfied, but the sub-sub control unit SS is configured to be ignored (out of range) even if the command is received. Also good. With this configuration, for example, when a 2R jackpot is executed, the hold display mode immediately before the jackpot and the hold display mode immediately after the jackpot end are the same. When executed, the hold display mode immediately before the jackpot can be configured to be different from the hold display mode immediately after the jackpot ends.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, in the gaming machine having a specification in which the probability variation gaming state can be ended depending on the number of times of variation of the main game symbol, the probability variation In the gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, the state is shifted to the limited frequency state, and the stay stage and the limited frequency table to be referred to are switched every time the main game symbol is changed a predetermined number of times. In addition to such a configuration, when the limited frequency table 1 is referenced, the expectation of jackpot when the reach fluctuation occurs is about 50%, and when the limited frequency table 2 is referenced, it is definite that the big hit is expected when the reach fluctuation occurs. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the specific game (probability varying game state and time-reduced game state) without getting tired. In addition, when executing a huge hold prefetch effect that cannot be executed in duplicate with other prefetch effects, the command related to the other prefetch effects is determined to be out of the range, and when the skewered hold prefetch effect is executed, the fourth digest order is displayed on hold. On the other hand, the command to the sub-sub control unit related to the hold display mode suitable for the game and the change suggestion display mode, such as the hold of the fourth digestion order is out of range because the hold change is not executed. By setting the content and command transmission mode, the command content and command transmission mode more suitable for the specifications of the gaming machine can be obtained.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the second main game hold occurs at the time of execution of the hold prefetch effect on the first main game side, it is determined that the situation is irregular, Although all the processes related to the hold prefetch effect on the first main game side are cleared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process to be executed can be made different depending on the type of the prefetch effect. Therefore, such a configuration will be described as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only changes from the first modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 37 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2186 (second variation 2). That is, after the holding continuation counter SM22c is reset (cleared to zero) in step 2180 (second variation), step 2186 (second variation 2) is performed. ), The hold prefetch giant effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the flag area of the prefetch related information temporary storage means SM26b and determines whether or not the huge hold prefetch execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2186 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to step 2182 (second), in which the process related to the prefetch effect is initialized, and in the case of No, the next process (process in step 2112). Migrate to

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment, a huge hold that is a pre-reading effect that does not interfere with the effect even if the second main game hold occurs during the execution. When the pre-reading effect is executed, even if the second main game hold occurs, the huge hold pre-reading effect is continuously displayed, while the second main game hold is executed when the pre-reading effect on the first main game side other than the huge hold pre-reading effect is executed. In the case of occurrence of the second main game hold, it is determined that the situation is irregular and all processing related to the hold prefetching effect on the first main game side being executed is cleared. Even in this case, it is possible to execute processing according to the type of prefetching effect being executed.

  The second main game hold occurs during execution of a hold change prefetch effect (for example, a huge hold prefetch effect) that is configured in the same manner as the second modification from the second embodiment and changes the hold display mode. Even so, the execution of the hold change prefetch effect continues (the hold display mode after the hold change is maintained), and the second main game hold occurs during the execution of the background change prefetch effect that is a prefetch effect that changes the background effect. In this case, the process related to the background change prefetch effect may be cleared (the hold change prefetch effect and the background change prefetch effect are the prefetch effects on the first main game side). Similarly, when a second main game hold occurs during execution of a hold change prefetch effect that is a prefetch effect that changes the hold display mode, the process related to the hold change prefetch effect is cleared and the background effect is changed. When the second main game suspension occurs during execution of the background change prefetch effect that is the prefetch effect, the background change prefetch effect may be continuously executed.

  Note that the reserved supplementary information (also referred to as supplementary information or supplementary image) in this example corresponds to an effect display corresponding to the reserved display displayed in the vicinity of the reserved display and the reserved display displayed overlapping the reserved display. Effect display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the hold display (for example, “heat” is displayed in the hold display), and the change suggestion display displayed in the vicinity of the change suggestion display. A corresponding effect display, an effect display corresponding to the change suggestion display displayed overlapping the change suggestion display, and an effect display corresponding to the change suggestion display displayed in the change suggestion display (for example, In the change suggestion display, “heat” is displayed).

  Note that the hold display and hold incidental information in this example (1) can be changed (additional) with an action (holding pre-reading effect, etc.) (the contents of the action are different depending on whether it changes or incidental). In such a case, the type of action that can be executed may be different between change and incidental.), (2) Difference between pending change action and pending incidental information incidental action (3) The pending change action and / or the pending incidental information incidental action may fail (no pending change, no pending incidental information will be attached), but the action may be executed again after the failure. (4) When multiple actions (holding change action or holding incidental information incidental action) are executed with one or more symbol variations, Each action may be a different action or the same action. (5) Multiple actions (holding change action or holding incidental information incidental action) with one or more symbol variations When executed, the jackpot expectation degree and / or action success expectation degree of the action of the plurality of times {or change degree when the action is successful (for example, “white” is changed to “blue” or “white” ”To“ red ”or the rank-up degree such as 1-step up or 2-step up)} may be different or the same (the action failure probability is also executed) It may be different depending on the type of the above). In addition, in one symbol variation, (1) rank up multiple stages by one action (“white”, “blue”, “red” in descending order of big hit expectation) → “Red” ranks up to 2 levels), (2) Ranks up 1 level by one action, (3) Ranks up multiple levels by multiple actions (for example, total by 2 actions) 2), (4) The configuration of (1) or (2) is applied to the pending display, and the configurations of (1) to (3) are applied to the change suggestion display. (5) For the change suggestion display, the configurations (1) to (3) can be executed a plurality of times {for example, (2) is executed after (1), (1) after (1) ), Etc.} may be configured.

  In addition, as illustrated in this example, the variation time determined by the number of holdings at the time of determining the variation time of the main game symbol may be different, and the main number when the number of holdings at the time of determining the variation time is three. The game symbol variation time is 3 seconds (the symbol variation is defined as symbol variation A), and the main game symbol variation time is 11 seconds (the symbol variation is symbol variation B) when the variation time is determined to be one. (1) An action (holding change action or holding incidental information accompanying action) can be executed with symbol variation A and symbol variation B, but action (holding) with symbol variation A and symbol variation B The change action or the action accompanied by the holding information is different (action A in the case of symbol variation A, action B in the case of symbol variation B), (2) symbol variation B is being executed, and the remaining Fluctuation time is 3 seconds Pending change upon but the action A is not executed even if the trigger hold has occurred the trigger hold occurs when a top is feasible, it may be configured. Further, even when configured in this way, the next change may be started so that a pending change (or change of the change suggestion display mode) can be executed thereafter.

(Example of changing the pre-reading production)
In addition to the configuration described above, various effects can be applied to the effects of prefetch effects that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. Therefore, an example of changing the effect of the pre-reading effect not described above will be described in detail below. In addition, in the example given below, all the holdings that are not specified are all the holdings on the first main game side (the holdings displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG), and what is the order of digestion The hold display mode and the like are merely examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 1)
First, FIG. 64 is a change example 1 of a pre-reading effect. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. After that, with the same change, penguin as the first hold change effect (the hold change expectation as the first hold change effect (if the hold change expectation is low, there may be no hold change or no hold change And / or a change-on-change effect in which the average value of the jackpot expectation of the hold-display mode after the change is relatively low. In this example, “penguin”) appears. Next, “Penguin” is a weak effect as the second hold change effect (the hold change expectation degree as the second hold change effect (if the hold change expectation degree is low, there is a case where the hold change does not occur even if an action is taken). Or, there is a relatively large number of cases where there is no change in hold) and / or a hold change effect in which the average value of the jackpot expectation of the hold display mode after change is relatively low (in this example, a small star) Execute. Next, the hold display (the hold display in the third digestion order) that hits the weak effect changes from “white” to “blue”. Note that, depending on the action, it may be configured such that the pending change is deterministic. Specifically, when an action that causes the appearance of a penguin occurs, the degree of expected change is relatively low, and when an action that causes the appearance of a sheep occurs, it becomes deterministic that the change changes. When an action with (Small) appears, the expectation of pending change is relatively low, and when an action with Star (Large) appears, the pending change is deterministic. You may comprise.

  Next, in the second from the top, after “Penguin” appears as the first hold change effect, “Penguin” becomes the strong effect (the change change hold as the second hold change effect) with the same fluctuation. This is a pending change effect in which the average value of the jackpot expectation degree of the expectation level and / or the pending display mode after the change is relatively high, and in this example, star size) is executed. Next, the hold display (third hold order hold display) that hits the strong effect changes from “white” to “green”.

  Next, in the third from the top, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative pattern is fluctuating, and “sheep” as the first hold change effect (the hold change expectation degree and the first hold change effect) This is a hold change effect in which the average value of the jackpot expectation of the hold display mode after the change is relatively high, and in this example, “sheep”) appears. Next, in the same variation, “sheep” is a weak effect as the second hold change effect (the average value of the hold change expectation degree as the second hold change effect and / or the jackpot expectation degree after the change is relative) Is a low hold change effect, and in this example, a small star) is executed. Next, the hold display (the hold display in the third digestion order) that hits the weak effect changes from “white” to “yellow”.

  Next, in the bottom row, after “Sheep” appears as the first reserved change effect, “Sheep” is the strong effect as the second reserved change effect with the same change (the expected change degree of hold as the second reserved change effect). And / or a holding change effect in which the average value of the jackpot expectation of the holding display mode after the change is relatively high, and in this example, star size) is executed. Next, the hold display (the hold display in the third digestion order) that hits the strong effect changes from “white” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 64, two hold change effects of the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect are provided as the hold change effect, and depending on the type (or combination of types) of the hold change effect, It is configured so that the degree of expectation and / or the tendency of the pending change content can be different. Note that the jackpot expectation degree related to the hold display mode is in the order of “red”> “green”> “yellow”> “blue” from the highest order. In addition, in the case of the production of the production mode in which the object collides toward the hold display as in the second hold change production as shown in the same figure, depending on the display position of the trigger hold (digestion order of the trigger hold), The trajectory of the object is different (the production pattern is different). In addition, a success pattern and a failure pattern may be provided in the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect. When the first hold change effect is successful, the second hold change effect is executed, and the second hold change effect is successful. Then, you may comprise so that a pending | holding change may be performed. In this example, the pending change effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first change suggestion display change effect and the first change suggestion change effect (the effect that the change suggestion display mode changes) are included. 2 The change suggestion display effect may be provided, and the jackpot expectation and / or the tendency of the pending change content may be different depending on the type of the change suggestion display change effect.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 2)
Next, FIG. 65 is a hold prefetch effect change example 2. First, in the top row, a trigger hold occurs during the change of the decorative pattern, the hold in the fourth digestion order is a trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold is a treasure box hold ( All the holds are the first main game hold). Then, after one change, the decoration symbol change ends and the lost symbol stops as the symbol change stop symbol. Thereafter, after two fluctuations, that is, in the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger suspension, the fluctuation suggestion display mode becomes the “treasure chest” display, and the effect of opening the “treasure chest” display is executed. Thereafter, with the same variation, a display indicating a battle effect (reach effect) appears from the opened “treasure box” display, and then the reach effect is executed.

  Next, in the lowermost stage, a trigger hold occurs during the change of the decorative design, the hold in the fourth digestion order is a trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold is a treasure box hold. After one change from the state, the decoration symbol change ends, and the jackpot symbol stops as the symbol change stop symbol. Thereafter, with the same change, the trigger hold display mode changes from “treasure chest” to “white” when the jackpot symbol is stopped (information indicating that the trigger is on hold is also deleted).

  In this way, in FIG. 65, the treasure chest hold is configured to be displayed as the display mode of the trigger hold when the hold change effect is executed, and the treasure chest hold has the symbol variation related to the trigger hold. The display mode is configured so as to be kept secret until the start of the change suggestion display mode. In other words, it is configured so that the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is concealed until the symbol variation of the trigger suspension is started. In addition, the treasure chest hold may be configured to open before the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started, but even in such a configuration, the “treasure chest” display is displayed by the symbol change related to the trigger hold. It is desirable that the ratio of opening be lower before the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is started, compared to the ratio of opening. In addition to opening the “treasure chest” display, the color of the “treasure chest” display may be changed, or the “treasure chest” display may be rattled. The possibility of appearing is high (there is a case where nothing appears), and the change suggestion display mode when the hold displayed in the “treasure chest” display is digested has a high expectation degree of jackpot You may comprise so that it may be easy. Further, although not shown in the figure, it may be configured to indicate the content of the notice effect after the “treasure box” display is opened by a hold display other than the trigger hold during execution of the prefetch effect (for example, a big hit You may be tempted to perform a highly anticipated notice effect). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the big hit is started or the game state is shifted, all the hold display modes including the hold on the trigger are “white” (the hold when the pre-reading effect is not executed). It is configured to return to (display mode) (the execution of the prefetch effect is also terminated). Further, when the second main game hold occurs, the pre-reading effect such as the hold change is not executed in the symbol variation related to the second main game hold. In addition, as a type of the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode, a first type mode that is a display mode that can be changed during hold display and a second type mode that is a display mode that does not change during hold display. When provided, the first type mode includes both the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode. For example, the display of “red” in the hold display and the display of “red” in the change suggestion display are somewhat Even if there is a difference in shape (difference in size, etc.), it may be considered to be the same.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 3)
Next, FIG. 66 is a hold prefetch effect change example 3. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. After that, with the same change, the sword (small) sticking effect (the hold change expectation as the hold change effect and / or the big hit expectation of the hold display after the change as the hold change effect for the hold display which is the second digestion order as the pre-reading effect The change effect with a relatively low average value) is executed, the effect is successful, and the sword (small) is stabbed into the on-hold display mode (stabbed as on-hold information). Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the hold with the sword stuck changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the second row from the top, a sword (small) sticking effect (holding change expectation degree and / or hold display mode after change as a hold change effect) with respect to the hold display which is the second digestion order as a prefetch effect Is held change effect with a relatively low average value of the big hit expectation degree), the effect fails, and the sword (small) does not pierce the hold display mode. Thereafter, the hold display mode does not change because the sword did not pierce with the same fluctuation.

  Next, in the third from the top, a sword (large) sticking effect (holding change expected degree and / or hold display mode after change as a hold change effect) with respect to the hold display which is the second digestion order as a prefetch effect Is executed, the effect is successful, and the sword (large) is stabbed into the on-hold display mode (stabbed as on-hold information). Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the hold with the sword stuck changes from “white” to “red”.

  Next, in the lowermost stage, the sword (large) sticking effect (the hold change expectation degree as the hold change effect and / or the jackpot of the hold display mode after the change as the hold change effect with respect to the hold display which is the second digestion order as the pre-reading effect The hold change effect with a relatively high expectation average value) is executed, the effect fails, and the sword (large) does not pierce the hold display mode. After that, with the same variation, the hold display mode will not change because the sword has not been pierced, but an effect that informs the player that the sword (large) production is almost definitive (stabbed). Therefore, when it fails (no piercing), it is treated as a special effect (so-called premier effect), and it becomes definite that the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension becomes a big hit. By configuring in this way, even if the sword (large) production where the big hit expectation degree becomes a high expectation degree fails, it is definite that the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger suspension at the time of the failure becomes a loss fluctuation. It can be configured not to be.

  In this way, in FIG. 66, there are two pending change effects of sword (small) and sword (large), and the probability that the sword (large) will be more successful than sword (small) ( The probability of being stabbed) is high, and the probability of being a big hit when the production is successful (when stabbed) is high. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the sword (large) is more likely to succeed in the production than the sword (small). May be higher than the sword (large), etc., or the sword (large) is more likely to win a big hit than the sword (small). (Small) is higher than Sword (Large), etc.}. In addition, the sword (large) is more difficult to succeed than the sword (small), but if successful, the sword (large) has a higher expectation of the big hit than the sword (small) The display mode may be changed easily). In other words, the sword (small) is more likely to succeed than the sword (large), but if successful, the sword (small) is less likely to hit the jackpot than the sword (large). It may be configured to easily change to a hold display mode.

(Reservation pre-reading production example 4)
Next, FIG. 67 is a reservation prefetch effect change example 4. First, in the top row, the number of holds is 3, and a hold frame (a display that surrounds four hold displays, and the hold frame is configured to be actionable) is displayed in a normal display mode. Has been. After that, with the same fluctuation, the hold frame action (small) is executed (the hold frame is shining sparingly). Thereafter, with the same variation, the third digestion order changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the second row from the top, the number of holds is 3, and a hold frame (a display that surrounds four hold displays, and the hold frame is configured to be actionable) is a normal display mode. Is displayed. After that, with the same fluctuation, the reserved frame action (large) is executed (the reserved frame shines violently). Thereafter, with the same variation, the third digestion order is changed from “white” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 67, two hold change effects of a hold frame action (small) and a hold frame action (large) are provided, and when the hold frame action is executed, Thus, it is configured so that the pending change is executed deterministically. In addition, when the hold frame action (large) is executed, the change to the hold display mode having a high jackpot expectation is easier than when the hold frame action (small) is executed. In addition, it is not limited to such a structure, You may provide the case (a so-called gusset effect) when a holding | maintenance frame action is performed but a holding | maintenance does not change. Further, the change suggestion display mode may be changed when the holding frame action is executed. In addition, with regard to the hold frame action, it is possible to suggest a possibility of a change in the hold display mode remaining due to the symbol fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation after the action is executed by executing the action. Good (may be configured so that changing is deterministic).

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 5)
Next, FIG. 68 is a reserved pre-reading effect change example 5. First, in the uppermost row, the number of holds is three. Thereafter, with the same variation, two options of “sheep” and “penguin” are displayed as the holding supplementary information (the notice effect related to the pre-reading effect displayed near the hold display). Thereafter, with the same variation, “sheep” is selected from the options of the holding supplementary information, and the “sheep” executes an action on the effect display device SG. The big hit expectation degree of the pre-reading effect is relatively low.

  Next, in the second row from the top, under the situation where the number of holds is three, “sheep”, “penguin”, “chick” as the accompanying information (notice effect relating to the pre-reading effect displayed near the hold display) The following three options are displayed. Thereafter, with the same variation, “penguin” is selected from the options of the holding supplementary information, and the “penguin” executes an action on the effect display device SG. The big hit expectation degree of the pre-reading effect is relatively high.

  Next, in the bottom row, under the situation where the number of holds is three, only one option of “sheep” is displayed as hold supplementary information (a notice effect related to a prefetch effect displayed near the hold display). Thereafter, with the same variation, “sheep” is selected from the options of the holding supplementary information, and the “sheep” executes an action on the effect display device SG. Here, since the pre-reading effect to be selected is basically an effect that can be selected from a plurality of choices, if only one selection is made, it is definite that it will be a big hit as a premier effect. It is comprised so that it may become.

  As described above, in FIG. 68, when there are a plurality of options displayed as the holding supplementary information, the larger the number of options, the higher the jackpot expectation, and the case where there is only one option. It is configured so that the symbol variation is a big hit. In addition, all options may be executed, for example, sheep suggests execution of pseudo-continuous fluctuation, penguin indicates execution of super reach, and chick indicates execution of other notices (step-up notice, etc.). Alternatively, it may be configured such that an effect corresponding to the option is executed by the symbol variation as much as each option is executed.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 6)
Next, FIG. 69 is a hold prefetch effect change example 6. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same variation, the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the halted symbol of the variation and the special symbol (decorative symbol of the decorative symbol that triggers execution of the hold change effect) are stopped. Thereafter, with the same variation, the display mode of the third digestion order hold changes from “white” to “blue” when the special symbol is stopped.

  In this way, in FIG. 69, the hold change effect is executed when the special symbol, which is a stop symbol for executing the hold change effect as the decorative symbol stop symbol, stops (definite stop display or temporary stop display). It will be. Note that the execution timing of the hold change effect may be executed from the stop timing of the special symbol to the start timing of the next variation. In addition, as a configuration example in which a change in hold is executed when the special symbol is stopped, for example, the effect content that the special symbol does not stop before the trigger hold occurs as the effect content related to a certain symbol variation is determined. In this case, it may be possible to replace the effect content with the effect content that the special symbol stops due to the occurrence of the trigger hold. As a replacement condition in such a case, the symbol variation currently being executed is not a specific symbol variation (for example, symbol variation that is a big hit), and from a predetermined timing (for example, timing one second before the variation stop). May be configured to be replaced when the previous timing is reached.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 7)
Next, FIG. 70 is a reservation prefetch effect change example 7. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. After that, “Penguin” becomes the change suggestion display as the change suggestion display change effect (the change suggestion display change effect is used as the change suggestion display change effect because the change suggestion display is not on hold). The action of skipping the “blue” ball (display mode similar to the hold display) is executed. Thereafter, with the same variation, the display mode of the variation suggestion display in which the “blue” ball collides changes from “white” to “blue”. Thereafter, in the same variation, an action is performed in which “sheep” skips a “red” ball (display mode similar to the hold display) toward the variation suggestion display as the variation suggestion display change effect. Thereafter, with the same change, the display mode of the change suggestion display in which the “red” ball collides changes from “blue” to “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 70, a plurality of hold change effects and hold changes can be executed in one symbol variation period. It should be noted that there may be a case where the hold change effect is not executed even when the hold change effect is executed. In such a configuration, for example, the hold change effect is more easily changed as the number of executions of the hold change effect is increased. May be. Specifically, when the hold change effect is executed three times in one symbol variation, the hold change expectation degree (or hold on the third hold change effect is more than the first hold change effect). You may comprise so that the big hit expectation degree of the hold display aspect after a change may become high.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 8)
Next, FIG. 71 is an example 8 of changing the pre-reading effect. First, in the uppermost stage, the number of holds is 3, the hold in the third digestion order is a trigger hold, and the display mode of the trigger hold is rotation hold (the hold display is displayed in rotation). It has become. Here, the rotation hold is (1) a hold with a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot (a hold with a lower hit expectation degree than “blue” unless there is a change in hold from here), and (2) other This is a hold display mode having a relatively high hold change probability than the display mode hold, in other words, a hold suggesting the possibility of changing to a hold with a big hit expectation degree equal to or higher than the “blue” hold. After two fluctuations (two new holds have occurred), a strong background effect as a background effect (out of the background effects that are executed when a trigger hold has occurred) The background effect with a relatively high degree) is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold remains the rotation hold. After that, the execution of the strong background effect is maintained after one change, and the change suggestion display mode is rotated in the pattern change related to the trigger hold (the pattern change related to the trigger hold while the display mode of the trigger hold is the rotation display). Was started).

  Next, in the second row from the top, after two fluctuations in the symbol variation in which rotation hold has occurred (two new holds have occurred), a strong background effect is executed as the background effect, and the trigger hold display mode is Changes from rotation hold to red hold. After that, the execution of the strong background effect is maintained after one change, and the change suggestion display mode becomes “red” display in the symbol change related to the trigger hold (the trigger hold display mode remains “red” display). (Because the symbol variation related to has started).

  Next, in the third from the top, after 2 fluctuations of the symbol variation that caused rotation hold (newly 2 hold has occurred), a weak background effect (trigger hold has occurred) Among background effects executed as a trigger, a background effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation due to being executed) is executed, and the display mode of trigger hold remains rotation hold. After that, after the first fluctuation, the execution of the weak background effect is maintained, and the change suggestion display mode becomes the rotation display in the pattern change related to the trigger hold (the pattern change related to the trigger hold while the display mode of the trigger hold is the rotation display). Was started).

  Next, in the lowermost stage, after 2 fluctuations of the symbol variation that caused the rotation hold (newly 2 hold has occurred), the background effect is a weak background effect (trigger hold has occurred) Among the executed background effects, a background effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation level due to the execution is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold changes from the rotation hold to the blue hold. After one change, the execution of the weak background effect is maintained, and the change suggestion display mode becomes “blue” display in the symbol change related to the trigger hold (the trigger hold display mode remains “blue” display). (Because the symbol variation related to has started).

  As described above, in FIG. 71, the background effect is configured so that a weak background effect and a strong background effect having a higher probability of hitting the jackpot and / or a high probability that the rotation hold will be changed than the weak background effect are executable. . As for the big hit expectation, the strong background effect is executed and the rotation hold is not changed> the strong background effect is executed and the rotation hold is changed> the weak background effect is executed and the rotation hold is changed from the highest order If the strong background effect is executed and the rotation hold does not change, the strong background effect may change the rotation hold. Because it is an effect that informs the player that it is almost deterministic, if the change related to the trigger hold is started with the rotation on hold, it will be treated as a special effect (so-called premier effect), and the symbol change related to the trigger hold Is a decisive hit. Further, when there is a rotation hold, the rotation hold changes on hold based on whether or not a prefetch effect other than the hold change (background effect illustrated in this example, hold incidental information, etc.) is executed. The ratio is configured to be different. In addition, when the rotation hold is displayed, the ratio of the configuration shown in the figure is as follows: in order from the highest selection rate, “third from the top → fourth from the top or second from the top → up It is preferable that “the first one”.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 9)
Next, FIG. 72 is a hold prefetch effect change example 9. Note that the gaming machine shown in FIG. 72 has a sub input button SB that is a member whose effect can be executed by the player's operation. First, in the upper row, the number of holdings is 3, the holding of the third digestion order is the trigger holding, and the display mode of the trigger holding is rotation holding (the holding display is rotated and displayed). It has become. Thereafter, the sub input button SB is long-pressed with the same variation, and the trigger hold display mode changes from the rotation hold to the “red” hold. Then, after three changes, the change is related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode is “red” display, and the reach effect is executed.

  Next, in the lower stage, the sub input button SB is not operated due to the symbol fluctuation in which the rotation hold occurs, and the display mode of the trigger hold is maintained as the rotation hold. After that, the sub input button SB is not operated for two fluctuations. However, when the hold change effect is executed, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “rotation hold” to “red” hold. Thereafter, after one change, the change suggestion display mode becomes “red” display due to the change related to the trigger hold, and the reach effect is executed.

  In this way, in FIG. 72, the rotation hold is changed to “red” hold in both the upper stage and the lower stage, but a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB by the player (in this example, long press) ), The display of the result of the pending change may be accelerated. In addition, when the hold change is not scheduled to be executed (when the change related to the trigger hold is scheduled to start while the rotation is held), the hold change is executed even if a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB is executed. It is configured not to be.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 10)
Next, FIG. 73 is a reservation prefetch effect change example 10. First, the number of holds is three. Thereafter, with the same variation, an action is performed in which “Penguin” flares all the hold displays as a hold change effect. After that, with the same change, the hold display mode for the first digestion order changes from “white” to “blue”, and the hold display mode for the third digestion order changes from “white” to “red” To do.

  Thus, in FIG. 73, it is comprised so that a several hold display mode of a hold | maintenance can change by execution of one hold change production (hold change action). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the changed hold display position, the changed display mode, and the changed hold number are changed. In addition, as a configuration in which a plurality of hold display modes can be changed by executing a single hold change effect (hold change action), for example, a plurality (for example, two) of hold holds triggered by the occurrence of a trigger hold. As the display mode changes, a specific background effect (for example, a holding change frequent occurrence zone) occurs over a plurality of variations (two symbol variations because the two hold display modes have changed) as the hold display mode has subsequently changed. It may be configured that the hold display mode is changed again during the execution of the background effect (the design variation that becomes the specific background effect may be extended by the number of times the hold display mode is changed again). Further, action 1 and action 2 (for example, an action in which a penguin appears and a frame change action) may occur at the same time, and two or more stages of the hold display mode may be ranked by the simultaneously generated actions. Further, the present invention may be applied not only to the change suggestion display mode but also to the hold display mode.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 11)
Next, FIG. 74 is an example 11 of pre-reading effect change. First, the decorative symbol is fluctuating under the situation where the number of holdings is two, and the holding of the second digestion order is the trigger holding. Thereafter, with the same variation, the variation of the decorative pattern becomes reach variation. After that, with the same variation, the left stop symbol and the right stop symbol stop at the same “6” symbol as the reach variation, and the middle stop symbol is a special symbol “change” as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol variation. Stop at the symbol. Thereafter, with the same variation, a hold change effect is executed when the “change” symbol that is the special symbol is stopped, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 74, reach variation (reach effect) is executed, and as a result of the reach variation (reach effect), the pre-reading effect and the hold change are triggered by the stop of the special symbol that suggests losing. Is configured to run. In addition, the look-ahead effect in this example is a symbol variation that was not scheduled to be executed before reaching the trigger hold (design variation that was scheduled to stop non-reach and lose symbols, for example, “ (6, 8, 4 "is scheduled to stop), the trigger change may be triggered and the special symbol may be stopped as described above. In the case of such a configuration, (1) the symbol variation for stopping the special symbol is the symbol variation before the trigger suspension occurs, and is not the symbol variation with a relatively high jackpot expectation such as super reach. (2) In the case where the loss occurs after the reach change and the case where the loss occurs after the non-reach change, the temporary stop time may be longer when the loss occurs after the reach change. Further, it may be configured such that the reach variation and the special symbol stop as described above can be executed regardless of the variation mode before the trigger suspension occurs.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 12)
Next, FIG. 75 is an example 12 of changing the pre-reading effect. First, in the upper stage, under the situation where the number of holdings is two, the second holding order holding is a trigger holding. Thereafter, with the same variation, the trigger hold hold display causes an action, and a treasure box display effect (effect in which the action is executed from the hold display and the treasure box display appears) is executed. Thereafter, with the same variation, a display of “red” hold appears from the treasure box as a result of the treasure box effect. After that, since the result of the treasure box production was “red” hold (because “red” hold appeared from the treasure box) with the same fluctuation, the display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “red”. Note that an image (for example, a red paint image) suggesting a change to “red” may appear without causing the “red” reserved image itself to appear from the treasure box.

  Next, in the lower row, the hold display of the trigger hold causes an action, and a treasure box display effect is executed. In the same variation, a display of “ska” appears from the treasure box as an effect result of the treasure box effect. After that, since the result of the treasure chest effect was “ska” hold (because “ska” appeared from the treasure box), the display mode of the trigger hold remains “white” with the same variation.

  As described above, in FIG. 75, as the hold change effect, whether or not the hold display of the trigger hold itself causes an action (notice effect), and whether or not the hold change is caused by the result of the action from the hold display of the trigger hold. The hold display mode after the hold change is determined. Although the hold change display of trigger hold itself is configured to be able to execute the hold change by causing an action (notice effect), it is not limited to this, and the change suggestion display mode may be changed. . In addition, when the hold display of the trigger hold itself causes an action (notice effect), if the action is continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuations, the hold change or the change suggestion display mode is executed. You may comprise.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 13)
Next, FIG. 76 is an example 13 of reservation pre-reading effect change. First, in the uppermost row, the number of holds is three. Thereafter, at timing 1 that is the same variation, an effect in which a penguin emits flame toward the variation suggestion display is executed as the variation suggestion display change effect (the effect that the variation suggestion display mode can change), and the change suggestion The display mode changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the middle row, the number of holds is three. After that, the penguin is directed to the change suggestion display as the change suggestion display change effect (the change suggestion display mode can be changed) at the timing 2 that is the same change and is later than the timing 1. An effect of spitting flames is executed, and the variation suggestion display mode changes from “white” to “yellow”.

  Next, the number of holdings is three at the bottom. Thereafter, the variation suggestion display change effect (the variation suggestion display mode may change) at timing 3 which is the same variation and is timing after timing 1 and timing after timing 2. As an effect), an effect in which a penguin emits flame toward the change suggestion display is executed, and the change suggestion display mode changes from “white” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 76, the change suggestion display change effect is configured to be executable at a plurality of timings (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3) in one symbol variation as the hold change effect. The jackpot expectation degree is “timing 3> timing 2> timing 1” in descending order, that is, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the change suggestion display changes at a later timing in one symbol fluctuation. It is comprised so that it may become. Moreover, you may comprise so that the said change suggestion display mode may change at two or more timings among these several timings.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 14)
Next, FIG. 77 is an example 14 of changing the pre-reading effect. First, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold. After that, with the same change, the treasure chest discovery effect (the content of how many treasure chests can be found is produced, and the number of treasure chests found in the effect will be accumulated and displayed as pending supplementary information) And find three treasure chests. Thereafter, with the same change, three treasure chests are accumulated and displayed as the reserved supplementary information as a result of the discovery of three treasure chests. Thereafter, after two fluctuations, a treasure box disclosure effect, which is an effect of opening the treasure box display accumulated and displayed as the holding supplementary information one by one, is executed. After that, with the same fluctuation, “red” hold is found in the third open treasure chest as the result of the treasure chest disclosure effect (the effect results are the first → ska, the second → ska, 3 Second → "red" is on hold). Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 77, a plurality of treasure chests discovered by treasure chest discovery effect can be displayed as the holding supplementary information. Further, until the treasure chest disclosure effect is executed, the contents (disclosure result) of the treasure chest display which is the holding supplementary information is kept secret. In addition, (1) there are a plurality of timings for executing a treasure chest discovery effect and / or a treasure box disclosure effect, and a ratio of occurrence of a hold display with a high jackpot expectation level and / or a high jackpot expectation level in the treasure box disclosure effect due to the timing. (2) There are a plurality of types of treasure chest display and / or types of treasure chest display of holding incidental information that can be found in the treasure chest discovery effect, and the jackpot expectation degree and / or the jackpot expectation degree in the treasure box disclosure effect depending on the type (3) There are a plurality of timings for executing the treasure chest finding effect, and the holding incidental information is accumulated and displayed each time the treasure chest finding effect is executed. May be. In addition to pending changes (changes in the change suggestion display), the treasure box also indicates whether or not pseudo-continuous changes have been executed, suggests the occurrence of a specific advance notice, and suggests jackpot expectations (displays such as “Gekiatsu” and “Chance”). You may comprise so that it may appear.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 15)
Next, FIG. 78 is a reservation prefetch effect change example 15. First, in the upper stage, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold. Thereafter, with the same variation, the sub input button A operation instruction effect (in this example, the sub input button A and the sub input as the sub input button operation instruction effect) There are two sub input buttons with the button B, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the sub input button A) is executed. Thereafter, with the same variation, the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “blue” when the sub input button A is operated.

  Next, in the lower row, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold. After that, with the same variation, the sub input button B operation instruction effect is provided as the sub input button operation instruction effect (in this example, the sub input button A and the sub input button B are provided as two sub input buttons. And an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub input button B). Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “red” when the sub input button B is operated.

  In this way, in FIG. 78, there are a plurality of sub input button operation instruction effects of the sub input button A operation instruction effect and the sub input button B operation instruction effect as the sub input button operation instruction effects. Is “sub input button B operation instruction effect> sub input button A operation instruction effect”, that is, the big hit expectation is different depending on the executed sub input button operation instruction effect. The sub input button operation instruction effect may be provided with an effect mode (so-called “gase effect”) in which the hold change is not executed even if the player operates the sub input button. You may comprise so that the generation | occurrence | production ratio of a gaze effect may differ with the sub input button operation instruction | indication effect performed. In this example, the hold change is executed by the sub input button operation instruction effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change suggestion display mode may be changed. In addition, the member to be operated is only the sub input button A, but may have a plurality of hold change effects with different operation modes, for example, a single press effect that presses the sub input button A only once, The sub-input button A is repeatedly pressed several times, and the big hit expectation is higher when the continuous hit effect is executed than when the single press effect is executed (or the hold change expectation is higher) It may be configured to easily change to a hold display mode with a high expectation degree of jackpot).

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 16)
Next, FIG. 79 is a holding prefetch effect change example 16. First, in the upper stage, the number of holdings is 2, and the holding of the second digestion order is the trigger holding. Thereafter, a reel effect in which two reel images appear with the same variation (an effect that suggests whether there is a pending change, unlike the main game symbol result and the suggested symbol variation) is executed. Thereafter, with the same variation, “change” on the left reel and “on” on the right reel stop as a reel effect stop symbol when the player operates the sub input button. After that, with the same fluctuation, the trigger suspension display mode changes from “white” to “red” when the reel effect stop symbol becomes “change” when the two reels are combined. After that, after 2 fluctuations, that is, in the pattern fluctuation related to the trigger hold, the “red” display is executed as the change suggestion display mode because the hold display mode of the trigger hold is “red”. Display of “chance” is executed from the “red” display as the notice effect (notice effect in which the change suggestion display mode causes an action).

  Next, in the lower row, a reel effect is executed, and after that, with the same change, the player operates the sub input button. Will stop. After that, with the same fluctuation, the trigger suspension display mode remains “white” when the reel effect stop symbol does not become “change” when the two reels are combined. In addition, since the change on hold was not executed, the change notice effect is not executed.

  In this way, in FIG. 79, when the reel effect is executed, the reel is stopped when the player operates the sub input button, and the two reels are combined as “change” as the effect result of the reel effect. Thus, the change change is executed and the change notice effect is executed when the change is executed. If the player does not operate the sub input button, the reel effect stops when a predetermined time has elapsed after the reel effect starts (the effect result is notified). Further, the sub input button can be operated any number of times until the fluctuation time elapses (ends), and each reel is stopped each time the operation is performed. That is, even if it fails once, it may be configured so that another challenge is possible. If the production is successful, the sub input button cannot be operated. In addition, it may be possible to arrange “change” and “change” multiple times, and after a change of hold once and after change of hold once, it is possible to expect further hold change by aligning again. (It may be executed for the change suggestion display).

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 17)
Next, FIG. 80 is a reservation prefetch effect change example 17. First, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold. After that, with the same variation, the hold-back concealment effect (the effect where all the hold displays are concealed) is executed with the occurrence of the trigger hold. After three changes, the hold concealment effect ends when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started, and “red” display is executed as the change suggestion display mode.

  As described above, in FIG. 80, it is configured to be able to execute a hold secret effect in which all hold indications are kept secret in response to occurrence of trigger hold, and when the hold secret effect is executed, It is definite that the change suggestion display mode is displayed in a display mode other than “white”, which is the normal display mode, but the display mode is “blue” or “red”. ) Is configured to be kept secret until the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is started. By configuring in this way, the player has changed the hold display of the trigger hold from “white” during execution of the hold secret effect, and the result is found in the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold. Then you will think. It should be noted that an action may be generated when the hold secret effect is executed, and it may be configured such that it is not possible to determine which of the hold display modes of the hold changed by the action. In addition, it is possible to suggest or notify that the change has been made with a sound (for example, if a sound such as “picone!” Is heard, it is determined that the change has been changed and cannot be determined by the appearance of the image). . The configuration may also be applied to the change suggestion display. However, in such a configuration, only a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (a timing before the change stop timing). It is preferable to display the change suggestion display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 18)
Next, FIG. 81 is an example 18 of changing the pre-reading effect. First, in the upper row, the number of holds is 3, the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold is “treasure box”. After one change, the pattern change is executed without causing a new hold. Thereafter, after two fluctuations, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is executed without occurrence of a new suspension, and the variation suggestion display mode of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is displayed in “treasure chest”.

  Next, in the lower row, the number of holds is 3, the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold is “treasure box”. Thereafter, after one change, a new hold occurs during the symbol change after the one change. Thereafter, after the same change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “treasure box” to “red” when the new hold is generated. After two fluctuations thereafter, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is executed, and the variation suggestion display mode of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is displayed in “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 81, when the trigger hold occurs, the hold display mode of the trigger hold becomes “treasure box”, but “treasure box” hold is a hold display mode that conceals the expectation of jackpot, At the time of occurrence of the hold, the player can recognize that the trigger hold has occurred, but cannot recognize the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold. In addition, the trigger hold with the hold display mode “treasure chest” is changed from the “treasure chest” when the hold hold effect is executed and the hold display effect of the trigger hold is changed when a new hold is generated after the trigger hold is generated. It is configured to

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 19)
Next, FIG. 82 shows a change example 19 of the pre-reading effect. First, in the upper huge hold pre-reading effect, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold related to the huge hold pre-reading effect, which is displayed when the huge hold prefetch effect (the huge hold pre-reading effect is executed) Information to be held) is being executed. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a hold on the second main game side occurs, but the execution of the huge hold prefetch effect (and the huge hold-over effect) is maintained. Then, after 3 fluctuations, the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold is started, and the change suggestion display mode becomes the huge hold display mode.

  Next, in the hold allocation pre-reading effect in the lower row, the number of holds is 3, the hold in the third digestion order is a trigger hold related to the hold allocation pre-reading effect, and is displayed at the time of execution of the hold allocation effect (holding pre-reading effect) Information that can be held) is being executed. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the hold on the second main game side occurs, and the execution of the hold prefetching effect is canceled due to the occurrence of the hold on the second main game side during the execution of the hold prefetching effect. After three fluctuations thereafter, the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold is started, but the execution of the hold prefetching effect is stopped, so that the fluctuation suggestion display mode is displayed in “white” display.

  In this way, in FIG. 82, even if a hold on the second main game side occurs during execution of the huge hold prefetch effect, the huge hold prefetch effect continues to be executed, while the hold prefetch effect is being executed. When the hold on the second main game side occurs, the execution of the hold prefetching effect is configured to be stopped. In the case where a pre-reading effect that can continue execution and a pre-reading effect that cancels execution are provided when a hold on the second main game side occurs, (1) execution stop timing of the hold pre-read effect (holding reserve preparation) The timing at which the display mode changes to “white”, the execution stop timing of the reserved allocation effect) is when the second main game side is on hold or when the second main game symbol starts to change, (2) non-time-reduced gaming state Table contents of the variation mode determination table on the first main game side and the variation mode determination table on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state (variable time that can be selected, whether or not it depends on the number of holds, etc.) (3) There is no change mode of the trigger hold related to the reserved prefetching effect on the second main game side, and (4) during the execution of the reserved prefetching effect, Ri specific announcement attraction not run only during the execution of the prefetch effect is executed, it may be configured. In addition, in FIG. 82, two prefetch effects such as a huge reserved prefetch effect and a reserved split prefetch effect are illustrated as the prefetch effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two prefetches, ie, a hold change effect and a display of hold incidental information. The configuration may be applied to an effect. For example, when a hold on the second main game side occurs during execution of a huge hold prefetch effect, a change in hold accompanying execution of the huge hold prefetch effect (in this example, While the huge reserve hold display mode) is maintained, the display of the hold supplementary information accompanying the execution of the huge hold pre-reading effect (in this example, the huge hold rolling effect) may be deleted, or the hold change effect The same configuration may be applied to the background change effect (when the hold on the second main game side occurs, the hold change is maintained, while the background change is erased, or the background change is Maintained That one, pending changes are erased).

(Reservation pre-reading effect change example 20)
Next, FIG. 83 is an example 20 of changing the pre-reading effect. First, in the uppermost stage, the number of reservations is 1, and the decorative symbols are fluctuating. Thereafter, a new trigger hold occurs with the same fluctuation. Thereafter, after one change, a new hold does not occur and the hold change effect is not executed.

  Next, in the second from the top, the number of reservations is 3, and the decorative symbols are fluctuating. Thereafter, a new trigger hold occurs with the same fluctuation. After one change, no new hold occurs. Thereafter, after two fluctuations, the hold change effect is not executed.

  Next, in the third from the top, the number of reservations is 3, and the decorative symbols are fluctuating. Thereafter, a new trigger hold occurs with the same fluctuation. After one change, no new hold has occurred. After that, a new hold occurs with the same fluctuation. Thereafter, with the same change, an effect is performed in which “sheep” skips the blue hold display toward the trigger hold as the first hold change effect in the change. Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold where the blue hold display collides changes from “white” to “blue”. Thereafter, with the same change, an effect is performed in which “lion” skips the red hold display toward the trigger hold as the second hold change effect in the change. Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold where the red hold display collides changes from “blue” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 83, the execution condition of the hold change effect is executed only when the hold number is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more and there is a hold that is digested after the trigger hold. Configured to be able to. Further, as shown in the figure, when the pre-reading effect shown in the figure is executed, a plurality of pending changes can be executed. Even in such a configuration, the change suggestion display change effect (the effect of changing the change suggestion display) is configured to be executable even if the number of holds at the time of trigger hold occurrence is less than a predetermined number. Also good. (1) When only the trigger hold is present at the time of trigger hold occurrence, the hold change effect for the trigger hold is not executed. (2) Hold is held even if there is no hold generated after the trigger hold. (3) When the hold change effect is executed by the hold change effect even if there is no hold that has occurred after the trigger hold, and there is no hold that has occurred after the trigger hold. There may be a case where the hold change effect is not executed.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects)
The configuration of the reservation pre-reading effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine in this example will be described in detail below.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 1)
When a specific prefetch effect is generated, the hold display may be erased and the hold change may not be executed during execution of the prefetch effect. In addition, when comprised in this way, the said change suggestion display may be displayed and you may comprise so that a display mode can also be changed.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 2)
(1) After notifying the player of the hold display mode after the hold change, the presence or absence of the hold change is determined according to the success or failure of one hold change action (changes to the hold display mode that is notified by the action success) (2) The hold display mode after the change in hold is not notified to the player, and the presence or absence of the hold change is determined according to the success or failure of one hold change action. (3) The hold display after the change in hold After notifying the player of a plurality of types of on-hold display modes as candidates for the mode, the status changes to one of the plurality of types of on-screen display mode candidates (the on-change change to either becomes deterministic when the action occurs). May be configured as follows.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 3)
(1) A treasure box is displayed as the variation suggestion display mode related to a certain symbol variation, the treasure chest opens during the certain symbol variation, and an item appears. (2) The treasure chest is displayed at the timing before the item appears. The display may change. (3) When the item does not appear until the timing when super reach is reached (for example, 30 seconds after the start of variation), the timing before the super reach is reached (for example, from the start of variation). You may comprise so that the big hit expectation degree of the said symbol fluctuation | variation may be higher than the case where an item appears in 5 second progress timing.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 4)
(1) The hold prefetching effect is not executed in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and (2) the hold prefetching effect is executed also in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. The execution time of the hold prefetch effect in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state is relatively shorter than the execution time of the hold prefetch effect in the game state other than the shortened game state. Good. Note that this configuration is applied to the second main game side symbol variation when the opening time extension function is activated (time shortening gaming state), and is first when the opening time extension function is not activated (non-time shortening gaming state). You may comprise so that it may be applied to the design fluctuation of the main game side.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 5)
As the hold display mode, there are multiple hold types (the shape of the hold display mode is different if the hold type is different), and there are multiple hold display modes in the same hold type (the hold shape is the same or similar) But the hold display color is different).

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 6)
(1) When the change suggestion display mode is changed (for example, when the display mode is other than “white”), the pending change is not executed. (2) The change suggestion display mode is changed. (For example, when the display mode is other than “white”) than when the change suggestion display mode is not changed (for example, when the display mode is “white”). The configuration may be such that the change on hold is difficult to be performed, and by doing so, the player pays attention to whether or not the symbol variation is a big hit. In addition, when the change suggestion display mode is changed, the hold change can be executed, but a plurality of hold changes may not be executed for a plurality of holds.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 6)
It is determined to what level the change suggestion display related to the certain hold changes according to the hold display form related to the certain hold (for example, the change suggestion display form related to the “red” hold is It is definite that the change suggestion display mode of the jackpot expectation degree of “red” or higher is determined, even though the hold display mode related to the certain hold is “red”. When the mode does not change to the display mode of “blue” or more, it becomes definite that the certain symbol variation will be a big hit, and when the shape of the hold display mode is “treasure box” If the change suggestion display mode is a display mode with a jackpot expectation level of “green” or higher, and the shape of the hold display mode is “safe”, the display of the change suggestion display mode is a jackpot expectation level of “red” or higher It is definitive to be a mode It may be so that configuration.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 7)
(1) The change suggestion display mode (in this example, “rainbow color”) that is decisive to be a big hit can be displayed, but the hold display mode that is definitive to be a big hit is not displayed. The indication that the jackpot is definitive can be displayed only in the change suggestion display, (2) the reservation incident that the jackpot is definitive or the jackpot expectation is high (the incidental information related to the change suggestion display) (The information is also reserved incidental information) can be displayed only in the additional incidental information related to the change suggestion display (not displayed in the additional incidental information related to the reserved display), (3) it becomes decisive to become a big hit, or Predictive change (the supplementary information related to the change suggestion display is also reserved supplementary information) is prefetched fluctuation (digested after trigger hold occurred, and digested before trigger hold) Not erased during symbol variation) performed according to the hold to be, it may be configured.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 8)
After a specific hold change, the hold change may not be executed any more. For example, when a jackpot display such as “rainbow color” becomes a definite display mode or “red” In the case of a hold display mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpot, such as a hold change is not executed any more (an effect related to the hold pre-reading effect is not executed). In addition, “pseudo” hold (which may have additional information) which is a display mode suggesting execution of “battle” hold and pseudo continuous change which is a display mode suggesting execution of battle reach effect is more than this. There is no change in the hold, or the incidental information does not change (not the appearance of new incidental information, the display form of the incidental information already attached does not change), and the display mode of the hold where the incidental information is attached It may be configured that only one can change.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 9)
During the small hit game, a hold pre-reading effect (holding change effect, background change effect, etc.) may be executed for the hold occurring before the start of the small hit game. In addition, when configured in such a manner, (1) shift to a limited frequency state after the end of the small hit game (if configured so that reach variation is easily performed by transition to the limited frequency state, reach variation (2) can be executed without doubt during execution of the small hit game, and the execution probability of the hold change that suggests the execution of reach change can be increased), (2 The reservation pre-reading effect that is executed during the small hit game may be executed other than during the small hit game.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 10)
The variation suggestion display mode suggests the jackpot expectation degree related to the symbol variation related to the variation suggestion display (the variation) and / or the contents of the effect executed by the variation, and “type of the variation suggestion display mode” You may comprise so that it may become "number> the number of kinds of a hold display mode." In addition, when there are many types of the change suggestion display, at the time of execution of the symbol change that becomes a long change time, it is possible to execute many changes of the change suggestion display mode (execution of multiple actions, Multi-level rank up, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that “the number of types of the change suggestion display mode <the number of types of the hold display mode”. In such a configuration, attention may be paid to the hold change until the symbol change related to the trigger hold. (This variation suggestion display mode is an effect that is mainly a reach effect or the like, and is suitable when there is no problem even if the number of types is not large).

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 11)
It has a look-ahead zone (for example, the background effect has changed) that is executed over multiple variations in the situation where there is a trigger hold, and if it is the look-ahead zone, it is not a look-ahead zone Also, it may be configured such that the hold change effect is easily executed. In addition, it may be configured to have two prefetch zones, prefetch zone A and prefetch zone B. In such a case, the prefetch zone A stays longer than the prefetch zone B stays. You may comprise so that a change production may generate | occur | produce easily. In addition, it is suitable to apply such a configuration to the configuration of the rotation hold described above, and when the rotation hold is displayed, when staying in the pre-read zone, than when not staying It is possible to configure so that the hold change is easy to be executed (it is easy to change to a hold display mode with a big hit expectation degree of “blue” or higher).

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 12)
It may be configured such that the hold frame as described above is displayed, and the display of the hold frame changes (hold frame change) every time the hold change effect is executed. Further, in such a configuration, (1) the holding frame change is not executed during a specific effect such as during super reach, and (2) the change suggestion display is not displayed when the holding frame change is not executed. However, when a change in the hold frame is executed, the change suggestion display is displayed so as to stand out for the player rather than the hold display. (3) A hold display that suggests execution of the hold change (for example, the rotation described above) It may be configured such that the change in the holding frame is not executed when the display changes to (display). In addition, (1) When shifting to the change suggestion display in the initial display form (for example, “white”) (the change suggestion display form is also “white”), the change suggestion display form is temporarily set. The display may be deleted immediately, but the change suggestion display mode is not displayed. (2) If the change suggestion display is shifted to a change suggestion state, the change suggestion display is relative. Display for a long time (for example, display until the end of symbol variation), and the display mode may change further during symbol variation. (3) Even in the case of (1) above, the display mode is suddenly initial. You may comprise so that the said change suggestion display mode changed from the display mode may be displayed (for example, it becomes "blue" display from non-display).

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 13)
It may be configured that there is a hold in which an effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button is executed in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. For example, (1) a big hit with low profit for the player An effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button is easier to execute than the hold that makes the hold more profitable for the player, and the hold changes even if the sub input button is operated during the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button. Difficult to execute (2) Executed when an effect that prompts the user to operate the sub input button is executed, when an effect that prompts the user to operate the sub input button is not executed, and when a hold change is executed The background effects may be different.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 14)
The effect display device and the effect display device are provided with a sub effect display device (so-called sub liquid crystal) capable of displaying different effects, the hold change effect executed by the sub effect display device, the effect display of the effect display device, and the sub There is a pending change effect that is executed in conjunction with the effect display of the effect display device.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 15)
By operating the sub input button within the effective period, the change suggestion display causes an action (for example, “chance” display) as many times as it is operated, and the pattern related to the change suggestion display depends on the type of the action. You may comprise so that the big hit expectation degree of a fluctuation | variation may differ.

(Other pre-reading effects 16)
As a hold change effect that can be executed in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, two hold displays change adjacently (for example, hold in the second digestion order and hold in the third digestion order) If the symbol change related to the suspended reservation is a big hit, it will be relatively profitable for the player, and if the symbol change related to the hold that will be digested later is a big hit, it will be relative to the player. However, it may be configured to have a low profit. In the case of such a configuration, the generation timing of the pre-reading effect is the time of the onset that is to be digested later. In addition, as a hold change executed in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, a high probability of winning big hits such as a specific notice effect or a reach effect due to a pattern change in a situation where a hold of a specific hold display mode remains. When an effect occurs (and a big hit), the symbol change is a high profit big hit {relatively many rounds, transitions to a probabilistic variable gaming state after the big hit ends (a big hit shifts to a non-stochastic variable gaming state after the big hit ends) It may be configured that the possibility of becoming a definite or a relatively high possibility of becoming a high profit jackpot.

(Other reserved lookahead effects 17)
As a result of a predetermined effect (for example, roulette effect), when group A and group B are included and the effect result is group A, the result of the effect is related to the auxiliary game, while the effect result is the group If it is B, the pending change is executed. In addition, when the production result is group A, it may be configured to suggest the result of the symbol variation.

(Other pre-reading effects 18)
For example, it may be configured to be able to notify the number of pending supplementary information in advance, for example, the number of pending supplementary information related to the variation suggestion display mode may be suggested at a time point before the suspension related to the variation suggestion display is digested. May be. In addition, the number of displayed pending supplementary information may be reduced during execution of pre-reading fluctuations (design fluctuations related to holdings that are digested after trigger holding occurs and that are consumed before trigger holding). May be relatively low (may be configured to be maintained or easily increased), and may be configured to have a relatively high possibility of being reduced when the symbol changes related to the trigger suspension. Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is desirable to comprise about a hold | maintenance display mode and the said change suggestion display mode so that it may not change to a display mode with a low jackpot expectation degree.

(Other reserved lookahead effects 19)
The rate at which the hold change effect is executed with respect to a certain hold is related to the case where the symbol variation related to the certain hold is a reach variation and is a design variation that causes a loss, and In the case where the symbol variation does not execute reach variation and is a symbol variation that becomes a loss, the former symbol variation related to the certain hold holds the symbol variation that performs reach variation and becomes a loss. You may comprise so that the direction where there is a change may be performed more easily. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when there is a hold that will execute reach fluctuation in a hold that is digested before the certain hold, it is digested before the certain hold. A hold change effect is less likely to be executed than when there is no hold that will cause reach fluctuation to be held, or a hold that will execute reach change to a hold that is digested before the certain hold. It may be configured so that the hold change effect is not executed when there is.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 20)
Even when the hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold, the hold change effect content related to the trigger hold may be determined based on the effect content at the time of the symbol change related to the determined trigger hold. In the case of such a configuration, the on-hold change effect may be executed at the on-hold digest timing that is digested before the trigger on-hold. Moreover, you may comprise so that a pending | holding change effect can be performed in multiple times with respect to the said trigger hold | maintenance, and when it is comprised in that way, every time a pending | holding change effect is performed, it is in a hold display mode with a high hit expectation degree. It is desirable to configure so that it changes (the jackpot expectation increases in rank). Specifically, the jackpot expectation corresponding to the hold display mode (the sum of the fluctuation that becomes a big hit and the fluctuation that causes a loss) The ratio of the appearance rate of fluctuation that becomes a big hit to the appearance rate) is “blue” → 10%, “yellow” → 30%, “red” → 70% When executing, when “yellow” is displayed as the hold display mode after execution of the first hold change effect, the hold display mode after execution of the second hold change effect is “red” (“blue”). , "Yellow" is the big hit expectation Not selected because it does not increase).

(Other reserved lookahead effects 21)
In a gaming machine that can execute a hold pre-reading effect (holding change effect, etc.), when a hold that becomes a big hit (or a small hit) is digested at a timing before a certain hold is consumed, or When the gaming state changes, the pre-read information related to the certain hold (command related to the pre-read effect) may be ignored. By configuring in this way, when notifying the variation result or variation mode in advance, when shifting from the probability variation gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state, or when transitioning from the time shortening gaming state to the non-time shortening gaming state In addition, it is possible to prevent the notification that disappoints the player's expectation, such as the fact that the variation result and / or variation mode notified in advance is different from the actual variation result and / or variation mode. Thereby, the trouble with a game store and a player which arises by performing the display which disappoints expectation can be prevented reliably. It should be noted that even when a hold that becomes a big hit (or small hit) at the timing before the certain hold is consumed, or when the gaming state changes, the big hit (or small hit) If the gaming state after the end does not change, or if the gaming state after the change may perform prefetching effects based on the prefetching information related to the certain hold, the prefetching information related to the certain hold You may comprise so that it may use without ignoring (command concerning prefetching production). In addition, the transition of the gaming state includes the termination of the probability variation gaming state due to the lapse of the number of variations after the end of the big hit, the termination of the time shortening gaming state (opening time extension function), etc. It may be configured to specify in advance (before migration).

(Other pre-reading effects 22)
When a certain hold occurs, a lottery (a lottery in which a certain hold becomes a trigger hold) is executed one or more times as to whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect at the timing after the certain hold occurs, You may comprise so that a prefetch effect may be performed from the timing which won the said lottery. With such a configuration, when a pre-reading effect is executed, the player cannot determine which hold is the hold that triggered the pre-reading effect, and expects any fluctuation during the pre-reading effect. There is an effect that you can feel.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 23)
It has at least a variation mode determination table A and a variation mode determination table B in which the same variation time is more easily selected than the variation mode determination table A, and is reserved when a pre-reading effect is executed (especially, it is digested before the trigger suspension). The change mode determination table B may be referred to when the change mode is determined).

(Other pre-reading effects 24)
As a feature of a gaming machine that can execute a specific notice effect as a pre-reading effect, (1) executed only when the number of holds is a predetermined number or more and a specific random number range for random determination and / or a specific variation mode determination random number range (2) Whether or not a specific notice effect is executed or the execution probability differs depending on whether a certain hold is the first main game hold or the second main game hold, (3) the main game at the time of trigger hold occurrence When the symbol is changing, the specific notice effect may be executed by the symbol variation after the symbol variation during the variation.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 25)
A hold display mode in which a certain hold (for example, trigger hold) has the highest expectation level for jackpots, or a game state after the jackpot has ended is most likely to shift to a probability variation gaming state (or transition to a probability variation gaming state) If it is displayed in a hold display mode (for example, “rainbow-colored hold display mode”), the hold change effect is not executed for the certain hold (the hold of the abnormality). The change may not be performed).

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 26)
When it is an image display that can be displayed around the hold display area, and it is possible to display a plurality of types of incidental information that will suggest a big hit expectation degree of symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and the trigger hold has occurred May be configured so that the supplementary information can be accumulated by the symbol variation related to the hold suspended before the trigger hold and the symbol variation related to the trigger hold. In addition, the number of times that the incidental information is accumulated in one symbol variation may be one or plural, and the number of symbol variations in which the incidental information is accumulated. The total number of incidental information to be accumulated may be larger than that. Specifically, if the fourth hold is a trigger hold, and if illegal information is stored such as “no storage → one storage → no storage → two storage”, the incidental information is While the accumulated symbol variation is two times, the total number of incidental information accumulated is three.

(Other reserved lookahead effects 27)
When the hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes, the symbol variation related to the hold that is consumed before the trigger hold becomes a big hit (or a small hit) May be configured so that the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold can be maintained during and / or after execution of the big hit (or small hit). When the win is “16R big hit”, the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold is not maintained (the normal hold display mode), and the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is “2R big hit” Alternatively, the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold may be maintained during and / or after execution of the big hit (or small hit) in the case of “small hit”. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent situations such as “2R big hit” and “small win”, etc., that impair the expectation for the trigger hold due to the low profit for the player.

(Other reserved lookahead effects 28)
As a look-ahead lottery, a pre-read lottery for performing a pre-read lottery when a hold occurs (when a game ball is won at the start opening) and a change start for executing a pre-read lottery when holding a hold (when a symbol change related to a hold starts) It is also possible to provide a time-ahead lottery, and when there is a trigger hold in the hold, neither the change-ahead look-ahead lottery or the winning-ahead look-ahead lottery is executed. Further, in the next variation of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, the variation prefetch lottery may not be executed, while the winning prefetch lottery may be performed. Further, it may be configured such that the change start prefetch lottery can be executed only for the hold that is not won in the winning prefetch lottery. With such a configuration, the pre-reading effects related to a plurality of trigger suspensions are not continuously executed, and other pre-reading effects are not executed during the execution of the pre-reading effects, and the player is currently being executed. It is possible to execute an appropriate prefetching effect, such as preventing a situation in which a prefetching effect is a prefetching effect started from which symbol change is prevented. Further, the execution timing of the prefetch lottery is not limited to this. For example, the prefetch lottery (the prefetch lottery during the variation) is performed at a timing in the middle of the symbol variation (for example, timing after 5 seconds from the start of the symbol variation). You may comprise so that it may perform. In addition, when the change pre-read lottery is won, the decorative design stop symbol may be changed before and after the change pre-read lottery win, and the effect contents being executed may be changed during the change. It may be configured to change before and after winning the pre-read lottery (rewrite at the time of winning the pre-fetch lottery during the change). In addition, when winning the pre-change lottery lottery, not only rewriting the stop symbol (or the effect to be executed) related to the currently changing symbol variation, but also to each symbol variation related to the trigger hold existing in the hold You may comprise so that the stop symbol in a fluctuation | variation (or production performed) may be rewritten.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 29)
As a pre-reading effect, a reserved pre-reading effect with a holding change effect, and a specific symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (a combination of a plurality of decorative symbols becomes a specific combination, or only a decorative symbol in a specific column becomes a special mode. ) May be provided with a specific symbol pre-reading effect that is continuously stopped and displayed over a plurality of variations, and in such a case, it can be executed only during the execution of the specific symbol pre-reading effect. An effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.) may be provided.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 30)
When the player can execute a button effect that suggests a big hit expectation level in the symbol variation by operating the sub input button, and the pre-reading effect can be performed over a plurality of variations, The execution frequency of the button effect in the final variation may be configured to be higher than the execution frequency of the button effect in the variation other than the final variation of the plurality of variations (the button effect is easy to be executed).

(Other reserved lookahead effects 31)
In a gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state can be ended by the completion of a certain number of symbol variations after the end of the special game, the probability variation gaming state is changed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of symbol variations) after the transition to the probability variation gaming state. The pre-read lottery or the pre-read effect may not be executed in a specific period (a specific number of symbol variations) before the end. In addition, the prefetch lottery or the prefetch effect is not executed during the period from the predetermined number of times of change in the probability variation gaming state to the final variation in the probability variation gaming state (the symbol variation that shifts from the next symbol variation to the non-probability variation gaming state). You may comprise. In other words, the pre-reading effect is not executed for the hold scheduled to be the final variation of the probability variation gaming state, in other words, the symbol variation one variation before the final variation (the symbol variation one rotation before the final variation) The pre-reading effect for the hold corresponding to the fluctuation is not executed. For example, it may be configured not to execute the change of the held image corresponding to the final change in the symbol change one change before the final change (predetermined period after the transition to the probability change game state or the end of the big hit The same may be applied to the hold that sometimes remains). In addition, the configuration (such as a configuration in which a pre-reading effect is not executed for the hold of the final change) may be applied to the time-saving gaming state (when the release extension function is activated). In addition, in the final variation of the probability variation gaming state (or the time-reduced gaming state), a prefetching effect (prefetching lottery) is performed for the suspension scheduled to be consumed after the final variation (especially the suspension on the second main game side). It may be configured not to execute.

(Other reserved look-ahead effects 32)
In the final variation in the time shortening gaming state (the symbol variation that shifts from the next symbol variation to the non-time shortening gaming state), the prefetch lottery (or the prefetching effect) may not be executed.

(Other reserved lookahead effects 33)
As a hold display mode, there is a specific hold display mode that can be displayed only when the number of holds is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, and when the specific hold display mode is displayed, a sub-input is given to the player as a notice effect. An effect that prompts the operation of the button is executed, and by operating the sub input button during the execution of the effect, the specific hold display mode is changed to a different hold display mode, or the specific hold display mode is configured to act. May be. In addition, the specific hold display mode is configured such that the ratio of the hold change at the time of the occurrence of the hold is higher than the other hold display modes after the hold change (hold display modes other than “white”). Such a configuration may be configured to be executed only when the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time-shortening gaming state are not set.

(Other pre-reading effects 34)
When the trigger hold occurs, the hold display, the change suggestion display, the display position and / or the display size of the hold frame may be changed. Further, the display of the hold frame may be continued even when the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is being executed and the notice effect is being executed.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an auxiliary image that is an image attached to the certain variable right image can be displayed.
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to execute a collaborative effect that is an effect of linking the certain variable right image and a predetermined notice effect,
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed or triggered by the execution of the cooperation effect. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to display an accompanying image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, The type of display in the variable right image
The variation display time of identification information when the variation display start condition of identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied is variable according to the number of suspensions remaining when the variation display start condition of identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied. Configured to
There are multiple types of display modes as the display mode of the display change effect, and when the display change effect is executed during the variation display of the identification information, depending on the remaining time until the variation display time of the identification information expires The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the display change effect is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
As a type of display mode of the variable right image, at least a first display type and a second display type that is a type different from the first display type,
The first display type has multiple types of display of the variable right image,
The display mode belonging to the first display type is configured to be able to change the type of display mode when the variable right image is shifted and displayed.
The display mode belonging to the second display type is configured so that the type of display mode cannot be changed or the type of display mode is harder to change than the first display type when the variable right image is shifted and displayed. And
When a variable right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in a display mode belonging to the first display type, the certain hold is subsequently identified. When the information change display start condition is satisfied, the change right image corresponding to the change display of the identification information related to the certain hold is configured to be displayed in the display mode belonging to the first display type,
When a certain variable right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in a display mode belonging to the second display type, the certain hold is subsequently identified. When the information change display start condition is satisfied, the change right image corresponding to the change display of the identification information related to the certain hold is displayed in the display mode belonging to the first display type. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
It is configured to suggest or notify the execution expectation level of the special game in the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
There are multiple types of display modes in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
Depending on the type of display in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, the execution expectation of the special game can be different,
The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is configured to be able to be changed during the variable display,
The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied has a plurality of types that can be changed during the variable display,
As the timing when the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied, the first timing and the first timing are changed during the variable display And at least a second timing that is closer to the timing at which the variation display ends than the timing,
When the type of display in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information that is performed when the variable information start display condition of the identification information is satisfied, it is changed at the first timing when the display mode is changed during the variable display The pachinko game is configured to be easily changed to a display mode indicating that the execution expectation of the special game is relatively higher when it is changed at the second timing than when played. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
There are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game Is configured to be in a specific gaming state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
When in the normal gaming state, the variable right image can be displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start display condition of the identification information is satisfied,
If it is in the specific gaming state, it is configured not to display the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start display condition of the identification information is satisfied, or in the specific gaming state In some cases, there is a higher probability of not displaying the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start display condition of the identification information is satisfied than in the case of the normal gaming state. And
The display mode belonging to the specific group among the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image is a display mode for notifying that the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed during the period in which the variable right image is displayed. Yes,
When a certain variable right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in a display mode belonging to the specific group, the certain hold is subsequently displayed as the identification information. When the variable display start condition is satisfied, when the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is displayed in the display mode belonging to the specific group, The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variation display of the identification information is changed to a display mode indicating the expected execution degree of the special game when the variation display of the identification information related to the certain hold is stopped. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
There are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game Is configured to be in a specific gaming state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, The type of display in the variable right image
When in the normal gaming state, the display change effect is executed when changing the type of display mode in the variable right image, while in the specific gaming state, the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed. The display change effect is configured so that the display change effect is not executed when the game is performed, or when the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Is configured to increase the probability of not executing
As the display mode of the display change effect, it has at least an effect display mode B different from the effect display mode A and the effect display mode A,
The display change effect is executed in the effect display mode B, compared to the case where the display change effect is executed in the effect display mode A and the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed in the state of the normal gaming state. In addition, when the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed, it is configured to be easily changed to a display mode indicating that the execution expectation degree of the special game is relatively high,
The display change effect can be executed even when the display mode type in the variable right image is not changed, and the display mode type in a certain variable right image is obtained after the display change effect is executed in the normal gaming state. Even if it is not changed, the special game can be executed in response to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold corresponding to the certain variable right image. This is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
Of the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image, the specific type of display mode is a display mode for notifying that it is definite that a special game will be executed in the future,
When displaying a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information display start condition of the identification information, it is not displayed in the specific type of display mode, but when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be displayed in the specific type of display mode when a variable right image corresponding to the variable display of identification information to be displayed is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an auxiliary image that is an image attached to the certain variable right image can be displayed.
A display that has a plurality of types of display modes as the types of incidental images, and that a specific type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes gives a notice that it is almost definite that a special game will be executed in the future. An aspect,
When displaying a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variation display start condition of the identification information, the additional image is not attached in the specific type of display mode, while the variation display start condition of the identification information is A pachinko game characterized in that, when a variable right image is displayed in response to a variable display of identification information performed when satisfied, an additional image can be attached in the specific type of display mode. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, The type of display in the variable right image
When a display change effect is executed within the variable display time of certain identification information, the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold can be changed for the hold remaining within the variable display time. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
As the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image, at least display mode A and display mode B which is a display mode different from display mode A,
The expected execution level of the special game related to the hold corresponding to the variable right image displayed in the display mode B is more than the expected execution level of the special game related to the hold corresponding to the variable right image displayed in the display mode A Is configured to be high,
As the announcement effect displayed during the variable display of the identification information, at least the announcement effect A and the announcement effect B which is the announcement effect different from the announcement effect A,
The execution expectation level of the special game related to the variable display in which the notice effect B is executed is relatively higher than the expected execution level of the special game related to the variable display in which the notice effect A is executed. ,
Display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the next scheduled digestion, and the variation display of the identification information when the suspension is digested and the variation display start condition of the identification information related to the suspension is satisfied The display mode B is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the next scheduled digestion, rather than the expected execution degree of the special game when the notice effect A is displayed in the middle. And when the notice effect A is displayed during the variation display of the identification information when the variation display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied, the execution expectation of the special game is higher,
Display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the next scheduled digestion, and the variation display of the identification information when the suspension is digested and the variation display start condition of the identification information related to the suspension is satisfied In the case where the notice effect B is displayed in the middle, the execution expectation degree of the special game is displayed as the display mode A of the variable right image corresponding to the hold scheduled for the next digestion. It is configured to be higher than the expected expectation of execution of the special game when the notice effect B is displayed during the variation display of the identification information when the variation display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
Satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold when there is a pre-digestion hold that will satisfy the change display start condition of the identification information before the certain hold and the certain hold During the fluctuation display of the identification information at the time, it is possible to execute the hold pre-reading effect that gives a notice of the expected degree of execution of the future special game due to the remaining hold during the fluctuation display of the identification information,
While the degree of expectation as to whether or not the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the certain hold is changed satisfies the change display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold, the change of the identification information is being displayed. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to differ depending on whether or not the holding pre-reading effect is executed and / or the execution content of the holding pre-reading effect.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
When the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the specific display mode, the variable information start of the identification information is started during the variable display It is configured not to change the type of display in the variable right image corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the condition, or corresponds to the variable display of the identification information that is performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied When the display mode in the variable right image is the specific display mode, the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the specific display mode. The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is less likely to be changed than in the case of Being configured,
The number of types of display modes in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the fluctuation corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information The pachinko gaming machine is configured to have more display modes than the right image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
The effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can be changed according to the operation mode on the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) that can be operated by the player.
The operation member (for example, at least a first operation mode and a second operation mode different from the first operation mode as an operation mode with the sub input button SB,
When the operation member (for example, the operation mode with the sub input button SB is performed in the first operation mode during the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, the display mode in the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to change the type of
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, if the operation mode of the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB is performed in the second operation mode), the display mode in the certain variable right image Is configured to change the type of
Execution expectation level of special game suggested in the display mode after change when the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed by the first operation mode, and the type of display mode in the variable right image by the second operation mode This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured so that the expected execution degree of the special game suggested in the display mode after the change when is changed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an auxiliary image that is an image attached to the certain variable right image can be displayed.
The first display type is different from the first display type as the type of the incidental image attached to the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied. At least a second display type,
There are multiple display modes of incidental images that are the second display type,
By displaying the incidental image, it suggests the expected degree of execution of the special game based on the variation display of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image, or is executed during the variation display of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image. It is structured to suggest the production contents,
The variation in the identification information corresponding to the incident image is more likely when the incident image is displayed in the display mode that is the second display type than when the incident image is displayed in the display mode that is the first display type. It is configured so that the player can easily recognize the expected content of the special game based on the display, or the content of the effect that is executed during the variation display of the identification information corresponding to the accompanying image,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the display mode of the accompanying image during the variable display of the identification information can be changed from the display mode as the first display type to the display mode as the second display type.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, Configured to change the type of display in the variable rights image
As a condition for executing the display change effect corresponding to a certain variable right image, when the number of holds at the time when the certain variable right image is newly displayed is a predetermined number or more, it corresponds to the certain variable right image. A pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to execute a display change effect.
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold occurs and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Apparatus SG), which has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a variable right image corresponding to a hold that does not satisfy the variable information start condition of the identification information, and also corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied It is configured to display variable rights images,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, Configured to change the type of display in the variable rights image
As a condition for executing the display change effect corresponding to a certain variable right image, when the number of holds at the time when the certain variable right image is newly displayed is a predetermined number or more, it corresponds to the certain variable right image. It is configured to perform display change effects,
In a variable display period of certain identification information, a display change effect corresponding to the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the certain identification information, which is performed when the variable display start condition of the certain identification information is satisfied, is performed a plurality of times. It may be a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be executable.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. A first random number temporary storage means (for example, a first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the first hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main information is displayed) according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display part A21g). -C),
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main information is displayed) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first / second main game symbol control means MP11 for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display part B21g). -C),
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) is advantageous to the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can be in a certain state;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT) and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state and after the execution of the special game Is configured to be in a specific gaming state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
Production display of a variable right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed when a new first hold or second hold occurs, and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied And a plurality of types of display modes including at least a normal display mode and a special display mode different from the normal display mode, and a certain variable right image is displayed. The type of display mode in the certain variable right image can be changed during a certain period,
In a situation where the display mode in a certain variable right image is a special display mode, the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group of the predetermined groups, and a special game is executed. When the special game is finished, the certain variable right image is configured to be in a special display mode,
In a situation where the display mode in a certain variable right image is a special display mode, the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a group other than the specific group of the predetermined group and is special. When a game is executed, the certain variable right image after the end of the special game is configured to be in a normal display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (17)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Temporary random number storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold means MJ32-A, second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the acquired random number and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main display) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
In the case where there is a pre-digest hold that is a hold that will satisfy the change display start condition of the identification information prior to the certain hold, the change display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-pending hold During the change display of the identification information at the time of satisfying, it is possible to execute a hold pre-reading effect to notify the expected degree of execution of a future special game due to the certain hold,
As the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect A and the pre-reading effect A are different from the pre-reading effect B, and the pre-reading effect C is different from the pre-reading effect A and the pre-reading effect B. And at least
The hold pre-reading effect A and the hold pre-reading effect B are configured not to be executed at the same time,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the hold prefetch effect B and the hold prefetch effect C are configured to be executed simultaneously.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (18)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. A first random number temporary storage means (for example, a first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the first hold to occur;
In a case where the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a first is determined based on the result of the determination. First identification information display control means (for example, the first identification information display control unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed. 1 and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
In a case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and a second is determined based on the result of the determination. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section. )When,
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. When,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
It has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state, and can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game. It is configured as
When the second hold has occurred, it is configured not to satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the first hold,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game part (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) is controlled. Production display control means SM20),
The effect display unit displays a variable right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed when a new first hold occurs, and is shifted when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. A period in which a variable right image is displayed and has a plurality of types of display modes including at least a normal display mode and a special display mode different from the normal display mode as a display mode of the variable right image. The type of display mode in the certain variable right image is configured to be changeable,
If there is a first hold and a first hold that is the first hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the first identification information before the first hold, the first hold During the variable display of the first identification information when the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information related to are satisfied, the pre-reading effect for pre-notifying the execution expectation degree of the future special game due to the certain first hold is executed. Is possible,
In the normal gaming state, the special display mode is displayed as the display mode in the variable right image related to a certain first hold, the hold pre-reading effect is being executed, and there is a new second hold. When this occurs, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display of the special display mode is maintained while the execution of the hold prefetch effect is stopped.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C10 1st grand prize entrance entrance judgment Means, MJ11-C20 second prize winning entrance determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Hold control means, MJ31 Hold digest control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 Symbol hold means MJ32-A First main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol hold information temporarily Storage means MJ32-B second main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol hold Means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN10 win / fail lottery means MN11-A first main game pass / fail lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game pass / fail lottery table MN11-B second Main game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game success / failure lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MN52 limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, MN52c limited frequency counter A
MN52c-2 limited frequency counter B, MN52b limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C first and second main game symbols Fluctuation management timer MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP20-B Second main game start opening / closing control means, MP21-B Second main game start opening electric combination Object opening / closing condition determining means MP22t-B Second main game start opening electric accessory release timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determining means, MP32 special game content determining means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game executing means MP33- C 1st and 2nd grand prize opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 Special Game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP40 small hit game control means, MP41t small hit game timer MP40b small hit game related information temporary storage means, MP50 specific game control means MP51 certain change end condition determination means, MP52 short time end condition determination Means MP52c Short-time counter, MB gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C first and second main gaming state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first and second main gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary gaming state temporary storage Means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A first main Game peripheral equipment, A10 1st main game start A11s First main game start entrance detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol hold display unit B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game Start port B11s Second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display unit B21h Second main game symbol hold display unit , C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st grand prize opening, C11s 1st big prize opening prize detection device C11d 1st big prize opening electric accessory, C20 2nd big prize opening C21s 2nd big prize opening Winning detection device, C21d 2nd big winning opening electric accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H2 1h Auxiliary game symbol hold display part S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means , SM21t, drawing variation time management timer SM22, drawing hold information display control means, SM22b, drawing hold information temporary storage means SM26, hold prefetch effect execution control means, SM26k hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26b, prefetch related information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determining means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23c Awakening stage stay counter, SM23c-2 Devil stage stay counter SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notification effect display content determination means SM24b Advance notice related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Effect display means (sub-sub-control section) ), SS10 sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display area, SG12 first reserved display section SG13 second reserved display section KH Award Ball payout control board KE Award ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting opening where game balls can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, the random number temporarily storing means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur,
When the change display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the success / failure determination is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information is changed in the identification information display unit based on the result of the determination of the success / failure An identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the identification information after the display,
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The effect display unit can display a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and that is shifted when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Yes, it has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during the period when the certain variable right image is displayed. ,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, after executing a display change effect which is an effect to suggest or notify that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed, The type of display in the variable right image
When a display change effect is executed within the variable display time of certain identification information, the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold can be changed for the hold remaining within the variable display time. Pachinko machines that are characterized by

Images